DX-9100 Configuration Guide: DX-9100 Extended Digital Plant Controller (Including L W Compatible DX-912x, Version 3)

System 91 Manual
DX-9100
Configuration Guide
Issue Date 0102
DX-9100 Configuration Guide
DX-9100 Extended Digital Plant Controller Page 5

(Including LONWORKS Compatible DX-912x, Version 3)
Introduction *5
Hardware Configuration 8
Software Configuration 11
DX-9100 Software Elements 11
Configuration Tools 11
Configuring the Controller 14
DX-9100 Controller Selection 14
DX-9100 Global Data 15
Configuration Number (Version 1.1 or Later) 16
Password Feature (Versions 1.4, 2.3, 3.3 or Later) 17
Analog Input Configuration 17
Digital Input Configuration 24
Analog Output Configuration 25
Digital Output Configuration 30
DO: Output Type 33
Constants and Result Status 39
Extension Module Configuration *41
Network Analog Input Configuration (Version 3 Only) 47
Network Digital Input Configuration (Version 3 Only) 48
Network Analog Output Configuration (Version 3 Only) 50
Network Digital Output Configuration (Version 3 Only) 51
Programmable Function Module Configuration 53
Control Algorithm Theory 59
*Indicates changes made since the last printing
2002 Johnson Controls, Inc. 1

Order No. MN-9100-4103
Algorithm 01 - PID Control Module 61
Algorithm 02 - ON/OFF Control Module 72
Algorithm 03 - Heating/Cooling PID Control Module (Dual PID) 80
Algorithm 04 - Heating/ Cooling ON/OFF Control Module (Dual On/Off) 93
Numerical Calculation and Other Function Module Configurations 101
Algorithm 11 - Average 101
Algorithm 12 - Minimum Select 103
Algorithm 13 - Maximum Select 104
Algorithm 14 - Psychrometric Calculation C 106
Algorithm 15 - Psychrometric Calculation F 109
Algorithm 16 - Line Segment 112
Algorithm 17 - Input Selector 114
Algorithm 18 - Calculator 116
Algorithm 19 - Timer Functions 118
Algorithm 20 - Totalization 121
Algorithm 21 - Comparator 125
Algorithm 22 - Sequencer 127
Algorithm 23 - Four-Channel Line Segment (Version 1.1 or Later) 142
Algorithm 24 - Eight-Channel Calculator (Version 1.1 or Later) 143
Time Program Functions 146
Time Schedule Configuration 147
Optimal Start/Stop Configuration 151
Programmable Logic Control Configuration 162
Dial-up Feature with an NDM 174
Trend Log (Versions 1.4, 2.3, 3.3 or Later) *178
Supervisory Mode Control Settings (General Module) *180
Controller Diagnostics 189
Power Up Conditions 189
Download/Upload 191
Calibration Values 194
2 Configuration GuideDX-9100
Appendix 1: SX Tool Item Description and Tables 195
Description of Items 195
Item List 196
Floating Point Numbers 198
EEPROM Items 198
Appendix 2: Item Structure 199

General Module Items Structure 199
Programmable Function Module Items Structure 206
Analog Input Module Items Structure 209
Analog Output Module Items Structure 210
Digital Output Module Items Structure 211
Extension Module Items Structure *212
Time Scheduling Items Structure 218
Optimal Start/Stop Items Structure 219
Network Information Module Items Structure 220
Network Digital Output Module Items Structure 220
Network Analog Output Module Items Structure *222
Network Digital Input Module Items Structure 224
Network Analog Input Module Items Structure *225
Configuration GuideDX-9100 3
Appendix 3: Programmable Function Module Items 227
Algorithm 1 - PID Controller 227
Algorithm 2 - ON/OFF Controller 229
Algorithm 3 - Heating/Cooling PID Controller 231
Algorithm 4 - Heating/Cooling ON/OFF Controller 233
Algorithm 11 - Average Calculation 236
Algorithm 12 - Minimum Selection 237
Algorithm 13 - Maximum Selection 238
Algorithm 14 - Psychrometric Calculation C 239
Algorithm 15 - Psychrometric Calculation F 240
Algorithm 16 - Line Segment Function 241
Algorithm 17 - Input Selector 242
Algorithm 18 - Calculator 243
Algorithm 19 - Timer Function 244
Algorithm 20 - Totalization 246
Algorithm 21 - Eight-Channel Comparator 249
Algorithm 22 - Sequencer 251
Algorithm 23 - Four-Channel Line Segment Function 254
Algorithm 24 - Eight-Channel Calculator 256
Appendix 4: Logic Variables 259

Description of Logic Variables 259
Logic Variable Tables 260
Appendix 5: Analog Items and Logic Variables

for the Trend Log Module *267
DX-9100 Extended Digital
Plant Controller
Introduction This document covers all three versions of the DX-9100 Extended
Digital Controller, including the LONWORKS compatible DX-912x
version.
The DX-9100 is the ideal digital control solution for multiple chiller or
boiler plant control applications, for the HVAC process of air handling
units or for distributed lighting and related electrical equipment control
applications. It provides precise Direct Digital Control as well as
Programmed Logic Control.
In a standalone configuration, the DX-9100 Controller has both the
hardware and software flexibility to adapt to the variety of control
processes found in its targeted applications. Along with its outstanding
control flexibility, the controller can expand its input and output point
capability by communicating with I/O Extension Modules on an
extension bus, and provides monitoring and control for all connected
points via its built-in LED display. Versions 1 and 2 can communicate
on the Metasys N2 Bus as well as on the System 91* Bus, providing
point control to the full Metasys Network or to the N30 Supervisory
Controller or Companion System. The Version 3 controller uses the
LONWORKS (Echelon) N2 Bus of the Metasys Control Module
(NCM311 or NCM361 in Europe, NCM300 or NCM350 elsewhere) in
place of the N2 Bus.
The DX-9100 has two packaging styles. In Version 1 all terminals for
field wiring are located within the controller enclosure. Versions 2 and
3 requires a separate field wiring mounting base or cabinet door
mounting frame which enables all field wiring to be completed before
the controller is installed.
2737
Figure 1: Version 1 (DX-9100-8154)

*The term "System 91 Bus" is not used in North America.
2276
Figure 2: DX-9100-8454 (Version 2) /

DX-912x-8454 (Version 3) with Mounting Base
The DX-9100 processes the analog and digital input signals it receives,
using 12 multi-purpose programmable function modules, a software-
implemented programmable logic controller (PLC), time schedule
modules and optimal start/stop modules to produce the required
outputs (depending on the module configuration), operating parameters
and programmed logic.
Configuration of all versions of the DX-9100 Controller are achieved
by using a personal computer with GX-9100 Graphic Configuration
Software (Version 5 or later) supplied by Johnson Controls. Changes to
the configuration can be made by using an SX-9120 Service Module
(Version 3.1 or later).
Versions 1 and 2 The DX-9100 can accept eight analog inputs and eight digital inputs.
(N2 Bus)
Version 1 of the controller (DX-9100-8154) provides up to eight
output modules, which are configured to give two analog outputs and
six digital outputs (triacs). The triacs can be separately configured to
provide six on/off or pulse outputs, three duration adjust outputs, three
position adjust (incremental) outputs, three start/stop outputs, or any
combination using up to six triacs.
Version 2 of the controller (DX-9100-8454) provides an additional six
analog output modules, giving a total of eight analog outputs.
The DX-9100 unit (versions 1 and 2) has two communication links.
One is called the N2 Bus or Bus 91 (the term Bus 91 is not used in
North America) and is used to interface to a supervisory unit. The other
link is called the XT Bus and is used to expand the DX-9100
input/output capability by interfacing up to eight XT-9100 or XTM-905
extension modules. The DX-9100 input/output can be extended by up
to 64 remote input/outputs, analog or digital, depending on the type of
the connected extension modules and XP expansion modules. Point
connections are made on XP modules which are monitored and
controlled by the XT-9100 or XTM-905 modules. For more details
refer to the XT-9100 or XTM-905 Technical Bulletin in the System 91
Manual. One XP module can provide either eight analog points or eight
digital points. Two XP modules connected to one extension module
can provide eight analog and eight digital points, or 16 digital points.
Version 1 or 2 of the DX-9100 can be used as a standalone controller
or it can be connected to a supervisory system through the RS-485
serial communications bus (N2 Bus or Bus 91).
Version 3 Version 3 of the controller (DX-912x-8454) brings peer-to-peer

(LONWORKS N2 communication to the already rich feature set of the Version 2
Bus) controller, and enhanced alarm reporting capability when used as an
integral part of a Metasys network.
The new communications features are provided by the LONWORKS
Network, which enables Version 3 controllers to pass data from one to
another and to send event-initiated data to the NCM350 or NCM361
Network Control Module, in the Metasys system. The LONWORKS
(Echelon) N2 Bus is used in place of the N2 Bus, and the NCM350 or
NCM361 must be fitted with a LONWORKS (Echelon) driver card.
The Version 3 controller retains all the input/output point and control
capabilities of the Version 2 controller, including the point expansion
feature using extension modules and expansion modules.
In addition to the Version 2 features, the Version 3 controller has
network input and output points which can be configured to transmit
and receive data over the LONWORKS bus. Each controller may have up
to 16 network analog input modules, 16 network analog output
modules, eight network digital input modules and eight network digital
output modules. While network analog input and output modules each
contain a single analog value, the network digital input and output
modules each contain 16 digital states which are transmitted as a block
between controllers. The transmission of point data is managed by the
LONWORKS network and is independent of the supervisory functions of
the Metasys Network Control Module. A network of Version 3
controllers can be installed to share analog and digital data between
controllers on a peer-to-peer basis; a Network Control Module is not
required unless the network is to be supervised by a Metasys system.
Complex control strategies may now be performed in multiple
DX-912x controllers without the need for network data exchange
routines in a supervisory controller. Applications include the control of
multiple, interdependent air handling units, and large hot water or
chilled water generating plants with components distributed in various
locations within the building.
LonMark The Version 3 controller has been approved as a LonMark device and
Compatibility conforms to the LonMark specification for network data transmission.
Further information about compatibility and interoperability with other

LonMark devices may be requested from your local Johnson Controls
office.
Hardware For full details of the hardware configuration, refer to the DX-9100
Configuration Extended Digital Controller Technical Bulletin (MN-9100-2110), the
XT-9100 Technical Bulletin, and the XTM-905 Technical Bulletin in
the System 91 Manual.
In summary, the DX-9100 has the following interfaces, inputs, and
outputs:
Versions 1 and 2 One N2 Bus (Bus 91) RS-485 port for supervisory system
communication.
Version 3 One LONWORKS N2 Bus for supervisory system communication
and peer-to-peer communication with other controllers on the
same bus. (Maximum of 30 controllers on one LONWORKS Bus.)
All Versions One XT Bus (RS-485 port) for up to eight extension modules and
a maximum of 64 inputs/outputs.
One port for service module (SX-9120) communication.
Eight digital input ports for connection to voltage-free contacts.
Eight analog input ports. The DX-9100 accepts 0-10 VDC or
0-20 mA signals from active sensors, or can be connected to
Nickel 1000 (JCI or DIN standard), Pt1000 or A99 passive
RTD sensors, as selected via jumpers on the circuit board.
Six isolated triac digital outputs to switch external 24 VAC
circuits with devices such as actuators or relays.
Version 1 Two analog output ports, 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mA, as selected via
jumpers on the circuit board. Also, 4-20 mA may be selected by
configuration.
Versions 2 and 3 Four analog outputs, 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mA, as selected via
jumpers on the circuit board. Also, 4-20 mA may be selected by
configuration.
Four additional analog outputs, 0-10 VDC only.
One RS-232-C port for local downloading and uploading software
configurations (N2 Bus protocol).
The software configuration determines how these inputs and outputs
are used, and their range and application.
The DX-9100 must be supplied with a 24 VAC power source. All
models are suitable for 50 Hz or 60 Hz through software configuration.
Software Configuration
DX-9100 The DX-9100 is a microprocessor-based programmable controller. It
Software has the following software elements:
Elements eight analog input modules
eight digital input modules
two analog output modules in Version 1; eight analog output
modules in versions 2 and 3.
six digital output modules
up to 64 additional inputs/outputs from up to eight extension
modules
twelve programmable function modules with algorithms for control
and calculation
eight analog constants and 32 digital constants
one programmable logic control module with 64 logic result statuses
eight time schedule modules
two optimal start/stop modules
Version 3 Only sixteen network analog input modules
eight network digital input modules
sixteen network analog output modules
eight network digital output modules
Configuration A user configures the controller using the GX-9100 Graphic Software
Tools Configuration Tool for Windows. The SX-9120 Service Module is
used to troubleshoot and adjust individual parameters. Techniques for
both tools are described in the following sections.
For complete documentation on both tools, see the GX-9100 Software
Configuration Tool for Windows Users Guide (MET-CTW-05) and
the SX-9120 Service Module Users Guide (MN-9100-6103).
Below is a brief description of the main features of the GX-9100
Software Configuration Tool. Note that the term, click on, means to
position the cursor on the module or menu and then press the
appropriate mouse button to select it.
Note: When using the GX Tool, after entering a parameter, always
click on OK to confirm.
Entering Data To enter data into a module displayed on the screen of the GX Tool,
Into Modules place the cursor on the module, click once on the right mouse button
and the module menu will appear:
Data...
Delete
Connect... F5
Disconnect... F4
Show Selected
Show User Names
Place the cursor on Data, and press either mouse button. A Data
Window appears containing all module data. Use the <Tab> key or
mouse to move the cursor from field to field. To make an entry, move
the cursor to the entry field and type in the information. To go to the
second page in the Data Window (if there is one), click on the Data-2
field. To return to the first page, click on OK or CANCEL.
To exit a window, click on OK to confirm entries, or CANCEL to
discard them, while in the first page.
Entering Values The following table shows the accuracy that may be lost due to
rounding errors. Number with a modulus of greater that 2047 may be
rounded up or down by 0.1% as follows:
Range Rounding (+/-)
2048-4095 2
4096-8191 4
8192-16383 8
16384-32767 16
The rounding is due to the external communications bus protocol and

does not compromise the precision of the internal control processes.
Entering User The Data Window contains User Name and Description entry fields.
Names Up to eight characters may be entered in the User Name field, and the
Description field can have up to 24 characters.
The Data Window also contains an Output Tag field for module
outputs (i.e. source points) which can be connected to another module
as inputs (destinations), and an Input Tag field for module inputs. To
enter User Names for outputs, position the cursor over the Output Tag
field and press the left mouse button once. To enter User Names for
inputs, select the Input Tag field.
Making To expand a module displayed on the screen of the GX Tool, in order
Connections to view input/output connections, place the cursor over the module and
double-click on the left mouse button. Input connections appear in the
left column with @ attached to the Tag Name, and output connections
are shown in the right column, except for output modules where all
connections appear in one column. To close a module, place the cursor
over the expanded module and double-click on the left mouse button.
Connections are made using one of the four methods outlined below.
Note that only the first method is referred to later in this manual. An
existing connection must be disconnected before making a new
connection.
The first method is to expand the source and destination modules by
moving the cursor to each module in turn and double-clicking the
left mouse button. Move the cursor over the desired output of the
source module and the cursor appears as an output arrow. Hold
down the left mouse button and drag the arrow to the desired
destination input. When the left mouse button is released, a
connection line will be drawn between the two modules.
The second method is to select the source module by positioning the
cursor over the module and pressing the left mouse button and then
the <F5> key. A list of the possible source output connections for
that module will be shown. Move the cursor to the desired output to
select it (it will appear highlighted) and click on OK (alternatively,
double-click on the desired output). To complete the connection,
select the destination module by pressing the left mouse button and
then the <F5> key. A list of the possible destination inputs for that
module will be shown. Select the desired destination from the dialog
box and click on OK (alternatively, double-click on the desired
destination). A connection line will be drawn between the two
modules.
The third method is to select the source module by positioning the
cursor over it and pressing the right mouse button. The module
menu will appear. Select Connect and a list of possible source
outputs for that module will appear in a dialog box. Move the cursor
to the desired output to select it (it will appear highlighted) and click
on OK (alternatively, double-click on the desired output). Then
select the destination module by positioning the cursor on it and
pressing the right mouse button. The module menu will appear.
Select Connect and a list of possible destination inputs for that
module will be shown. Move the cursor to the desired input to select
it and click on OK (alternatively, double-click on the desired input).
A connection line will be drawn between the two modules.
The fourth method is to go to the destination module data window,
move the cursor to a connection field, press the * key on the
keyboard, and the available source output tags will be displayed for
selection.
Configuring the Configuring the controller involves:
Controller defining characteristics and parameters of the input and output
modules, the programmable function modules for control and
calculation, the extension modules, and the programmable logic
control module
defining connections between the modules in order to achieve the
desired sequence of control
setting the time scheduling, optimal start/stop, and real time clock
parameters
Proceed in the following order:
1. Select the controller type (versions 1, 2 or 3).
2. Define DX-9100 Global Data under the Edit menu.
3. Define Job Information under the Edit menu.
4. Define analog and digital input characteristics.
5. Define analog and digital output characteristics.
6. Define extension module structures and characteristics.
7. When applicable, define network inputs and outputs for the
Version 3 controller (LONWORKS Bus).
8. Define programmable function module/algorithm characteristics.
9. Define time schedule and exception day settings.
10. Define programmable logic control module.
DX-9100 Via GX Tool

Controller Select the controller version under the Controller menu:
Selection
DX Version 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, or
DX Version 1.4, or
DX Version 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, or
DX Version 2.3, or
DX Version 3.0, 3.1, 3.2, or
DX Version 3.3.
Via the SX Tool

The SX Tool will display the controller type when first connected to
the controller. No user selection is required.
DX-9100 Global
Data
Set Power Line Via the GX Tool
Frequency
(50 or 60 Hz) At the menu bar at the top of the screen, select Edit-Global Data and a
window appears. Under Frequency, click on 50 or 60 hertz. Then click
on OK to confirm the setting. (To discard an entry, click on CANCEL.)
Via the SX Tool

Under General Module, set Bit X7 of Item DXS1 (RI.32):
X7 = 0 50 Hz power line
X7 = 1 60 Hz power line
Set Initialize on When this flag is set to cancelled or 1, the override-type items
Power Up Flag listed below are reset after each power up of the controller.
When set to maintained or 0, these override-type items are
maintained through the power failure.
Shutoff Mode Request
Startup Mode Request
Enable Digital Output (Triac) Supervisory Control
Set Digital Output (Triac) On
Output Hold Mode (Analog and Digital)
Programmable Function Module Hold
Time Schedule Module Hold Mode
Via the GX Tool

Select Edit-Global Data. Under Init. on Power Up, click on
maintained or cancelled.
Via the SX Tool

Under General Module, set Bit X8 of Item DXS1 (RI.32):
X8 = 0 No initialization on power up (commands from
supervisory system maintained)
X8 = 1 Initialization on power up (commands from
supervisory system cancelled)
Counter Type In the controller, four bytes are reserved for digital input counters and
Flag accumulators in programmable modules. When the DX-9100 is
connected to a Metasys supervisory system, the counter type flag must
be set to 0 because the system will only read 15 bits (maximum
reading of 32,767). For supervisory systems that can read four bytes, or
for standalone applications, the flag may be set to 1. The counter will
then read a maximum value of 9,999,999 and then reset to 0. See
Supervisory Mode Control Settings, further in this document.
Via the GX Tool

Select Edit-Global Data. Under Counter Type, click on one of the
following:
15-bit (Metasys)
4-byte
Via the SX Tool

Under General Module set in Bit X4 of Item DXS1 (RS.32):
X4 = 0 Selects 15-bit counters
X4 = 1 Selects 4-byte counters
Global Data For temperature unit selection, refer to the Analog Input Configuration
Notes section below.
For daylight saving time, refer to the Time Program Functions section
later in this document.
Configuration For configuration identification purposes a configuration number

Number may be entered which will be displayed on the front panel of the
(Version 1.1 or controller during initialization. The configuration number is also read
Later) and used by the DX LCD Display to identify which of the display
configurations in its data base to use for this controller.
Via the GX Tool

Select Edit-Global Data. Enter the appropriate number in the User
Config Code field.
Via the SX Tool

Under General Module, enter the appropriate number in
Item ALG (RI.33).
Password The password is used to protect a configuration when loaded into a
Feature controller. Once the password has been downloaded into the controller
(Versions 1.4, with the configuration, the controller will only allow a subsequent
2.3, 3.3 or later) download or upload when the password is entered in the Download or
Upload dialog box of the GX Software Configuration Tool. The
password is encrypted by the GX Tool before download. If the
password is lost and the user does not have access to the original
configuration file which includes the password, then the controller
must be returned to the supplier or the Johnson Controls factory to
have the memory cleared. A password of 0 disables the protection
feature.
Notes: 1. The password feature is enabled by an entry in the
GX9100.ini file of the GX Tool. The GX Tool software
is delivered without this entry. Contact your local
Johnson Controls sales office if you wish to enable the
password feature in your GX Tool.
2. This feature is only available with firmware versions 1.4,
2.3, 3.3 or later. In older versions the password feature was
not implemented.
Via the GX Tool

Select Edit-Global Data. Enter the password (one to four alpha-
numeric characters) in the Password field. Enter 0 if the password
feature is not required.
Via the SX Tool

The password cannot be accessed via the SX Tool. A GX Tool must be
used.
Analog Input The DX-9100 Controller can accept up to eight analog inputs, which
Configuration are active (voltage or current) or passive (RTD). Each analog input is
defined and configured by the following parameters:
User Name and Description (GX only)
Input Signal / Range
Measurement Units
Enable Square Root
Alarm on Unfiltered Value
Alarm Limits
Filter Time Constant
AI: Input Signal Via the GX Tool
and Ranging
To assign the input as active or passive, position the cursor on AIn and
double-click the left mouse button. Then position the cursor
accordingly and click the left mouse button once to select either
Active or Passive.
User Name and Select AIn using the right mouse button. Then select Data in the
Description module menu, and enter as appropriate:
User Name (maximum eight characters)
Description (maximum 24 characters)
For active inputs, at the Type of Active Input field, enter:
0= 0-10 VDC
1= 4-20 mA
2= 0-20 mA
Each analog input module performs the conversion of the input signal
to a variable numeric value expressed in engineering units obtained
using the high range and low range.
High Range (HR) = Enter the equivalent number for reading at high
signal input (10 V, 20 mA)
Low Range (LR) = Enter the reading at low signal input
(0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA)
AI = (PR% / 100) * (HR - LR) + LR
where: PR% = analog value in % of physical input
signal
For passive inputs at the Type of Passive Input field, enter:
1= Ni1000 (JCI characteristic)
2= Ni1000 Extended Temperature Range (JCI characteristic)
3= A99 (JCI characteristic)*
4= Pt1000 (DIN characteristic)
5= Ni1000 (L. & G. characteristic)
(Firmware, Version 1.1 or later)
6= Ni1000 (DIN characteristic)
(Firmware, Version 1.1 or later)
*Note: The North American JCI silicon sensors (TE-6000 series) have
very similar characteristics to the A99 sensor. At 21C/70F
and 25C/77F the reference values are identical. At
-40C/-40F the reading will be 0.8C/1.5F high. At
38C/100F the reading will be 0.3C/0.5F high.
For RTD inputs, the range of the displayed value is fixed according to
the type of sensor. The high/low range entries will not have any effect
on the actual sensor readout. The configured high and low ranges
determine the control range of any control module to which it is
connected. (The difference between the High Range value and the Low
Range value is equivalent to a proportional band of 100%.)
At the High/Low control range field, enter the required value:
High Range (Control) =
Low Range (Control) =
Via the SX Tool

Under Analog Inputs configure Item AITn (RI.00):
(Low Byte)
X7 = 0 0-10 Volts
X7 = 1 0-20 mA, 0-2 V or RTD
X8 = 1 20% suppression (2-10 V or 4-20 mA)
(High Byte)
X11 X10 X9 = 000 Active Sensor (Linear)
X11 X10 X9 = 001 Ni 1000 RTD Passive Sensor (JCI)
(-45 to +121C / -50 to +250F)
X11 X10 X9 = 010 Ni 1000 RTD High Temperature Sensor
(+21 to +288C / +70 to +550F)
X11 X10 X9 = 011 RTD Sensor A99 (JCI)
(-50 to +100C / -58 to +212F)
X11 X10 X9 = 100 RTD Sensor Platinum 1000 (DIN)
(-50 to +200C / -58 to +392F)
Version 1.1 or Later:
X11 X10 X9 = 101 Ni 1000 RTD (L. & G.)
(-50 to +150C / -58 to +302F)
X11 X10 X9 = 110 Ni 1000 RTD (DIN)
(-50 to +150C / -58 to 302F)
For active inputs, the analog input module performs the conversion of the
input signal to a variable numeric value expressed in engineering units
obtained using the high range at Item HRn (RI.01) and low range at Item
LRn (RI.02).
For RTD passive inputs, the range of the displayed value is fixed
according to the type of sensor. The configured range determines the
control range of any control module to which it is connected.
AI: Measurement Via the GX Tool
Units
To choose between Celsius or Fahrenheit for active and passive
sensors, select Edit-Global Data. Under Temperature Units, select
Celsius or Fahrenheit.
To set the measurement units for active sensors, select the AIn module,
and then Data to call up the Data Window. Enter in the Measurement
Units field:
0 = None
1 = Temperature (C or F as entered under Edit-Global Data)
2 = Percent (%) (Version 1 only)
In a Version 1 controller the units are displayed on the front panel of
the controller as t, % or none.
Via the SX Tool

Under Analog Inputs, configure Item AITn (RI.00). The
measurement and temperature units of each analog input can be
selected with the following bits (low byte):
X4 X3 X2 X1 = 0000 No Units
X4 X3 X2 X1 = 0001 Celsius
X4 X3 X2 X1 = 0010 Fahrenheit
X4 X3 X2 X1 = 0011 Percent (Version 1 only)
For RTD sensor inputs, Celsius and Fahrenheit units must be selected.
Changing individual units for each AI can only be done via the SX
Tool.
AI: Enable This function allows the linearization of the differential pressure signal
Square Root from a 0-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA active sensor; the function is effective
over the selected range and is only available for active sensors.
AI = sqrt(PR%/100) * (HR - LR) + LR
Where %PR = the Analog Value in % of the physical input signal
range; HR = High Range Value; and LR = Low Range Value.
Via the GX Tool (option only available with active sensor)

Select AIn. Then select Data in the module menu. At the Square
Root field, enter 0 to disable the square root function, or 1 to
enable the square root function.
Via the SX Tool

Under Analog Inputs, configure Item AITn (RI.00) (low byte):
X5 = 1 Enable Square Root of Input
X5 = 0 Disable Square Root of Input
AI: Alarm on An alarm from the High Limit and Low Limit Alarm values will be
Unfiltered Value generated from the unfiltered input.
Via the GX Tool

Select AIn. Then select Data in the module menu. At the Alarm
Unfiltered field, enter 0 to set an alarm on a filtered value, or 1 to
set an alarm on an unfiltered value.
Via the SX Tool

Under Analog Inputs, configure Item AITn (RI.00) (low byte):
X6 = 1 Alarm on Unfiltered Value
X6 = 0 Alarm on Filtered Value
AI: Alarm Limits The high limit and the low limit define at which levels the analog
input reading will generate an alarm, either for remote monitoring or
for internal use within the control sequences in the DX-9100. A limit
differential defines when a point comes out of alarm.
Note: The limits cannot be deleted. If you do not want alarms, enter
limits beyond the high/low range of the sensor.
High Alarm
High Limit
Differential
No Alarm
AI
Value
No Alarm
Differential
Low Limit
Low Alarm
dxcgala
Figure 3: How Alarm Limits Function
Via the GX Tool

Select AIn. Then select Data in the module menu. At the respective
field, enter the required value:
High Limit =
Low Limit =
Limit Differential =
The low and high limit alarm processing can be disabled. In the menu
bar, select Edit-Add Alarm Disable. The corresponding module (box)
will appear on screen. Make connections as described earlier under
Configuration Tools - Making Connections.
Note: The Alarm Disable feature is sometimes referred to as Auto
Shutdown in the supervisory system.
Via the SX Tool

Under Analog Inputs, the alarm limits differential is adjustable with
Item ADFn (RI.06). The high limit is at Item HIAn (RI.03), the low
limit is at Item LOAn (RI.04).
The low and high limit alarm processing can be disabled by making a
logical connection to Item ALD@ - Alarm Disable Condition Source
(General Module RI.31).
For Both SX and GX

When the logic signal connected to ALD@ or Alarm Disable
Condition Source is true (1), alarm states on analog inputs will be
frozen until the logical signal returns to false (0). (Alarm states on
analog inputs to XT modules are not frozen by the ALD@ connection.)
AI: Filter Time The Filter Time Constant Ts (seconds) is used to filter out any cyclic
Constant instability in the analog input signals. The calculations are:
FVt = FVt-1 + [1/(1 + Ts)] * (AIt - FVt-1)
Where: FVt = Filtered Analog Value at current time
FVt-1 = Filtered Analog Value at previous poll
AIt = Actual Analog Value at current time
Via the GX Tool

Select AIn. Then select Data in the module menu. At the Filter
Constant (sec) field, enter a number within the recommended range 0
to 10.
Via the SX Tool

Under Analog Inputs, the Filter Time Constant is selected at Item
FTCn (RI.05).
AI Notes 1. You can read the AI values, and read and modify the alarm limit
values using the DX front panel. See Display Panel and Keypads
in the DX-9100 Extended Digital Controller Technical Bulletin.
2. The alarm condition of one or more analog inputs is also indicated
by an LED (AL) on the front panel. If the LED is steady, the
current AI is in alarm; if flashing, another AI is in alarm.
3. Using the SX Tool, analog input values can be read at Analog
Inputs Item AIn (RI.07), and the percent of range value can be
read at Item AI%n (RI.08). The value as an ADC count can be
read at Item ADCn (RI.09).
4. Using the SX Tool, analog input alarm statuses can be read at
General Module Item AIS (RI.07), or at Analog Input Item AISTn
(RI.10), where bits X1 and X2 indicate the high and low alarm
conditions, respectively.
5. Under Analog Inputs, the analog Item AISTn (RI.10), Bits X3
and X4, indicate an input over-range (input about 2% of range
above HR) condition and an input under-range (input about 2% of
range below LR) condition, respectively. (This information is
available on the SX Tool only.)
6. Calibration coefficients for active and passive analog inputs are
stored in the EEPROM of the DX. See the Calibration Values
section further in this document.
GX Labels Source Points (Outputs)

AIn The current value of the analog input.
AI%n The current value of the analog input in percent (%) of
range.
AIHn A 1 if the analog input is above its high limit and not
below the high limit - limit differential.
AILn A 1 if the analog input is below the low limit and not
above the low limit + limit differential.
OVRn A 1 when the value of an active analog input is more than
about 2% above its high range (overrange condition), or a
passive analog input is open circuited.
UNRn A 1 when the value of an active analog input is more than
about 2% below its low range (underrange condition), or a
passive analog input is short circuited.
Destination Points (Inputs)

None.
Note: The following destination point is applicable to all analog
inputs:
ALDS@ The connection to disable alarm processing on analog inputs
AI1 - AI8.
Digital Input The DX-9100 controller can accept up to eight digital inputs, which
Configuration will be considered active when driven to a common digital ground by
an external volt-free contact. The DI is defined and configured by the
following parameters:
User Name and Description (GX only)
Prescaler
The digital input transitions are counted as follows:
Digital Prescale Count Pulse

Input Factor Transition Counter
DIn PCn DICn CNTRn
(RI.06) (RI.22-29) (RI.04) (RI.13-20)
Figure 4: Digital Input Transitions
The Pulse Counter (CNTRn) counts all state transitions of the bit-Item
DICn. A state transition at DICn occurs when the number of
transitions from 1 to 0 of DIn Digital Input equals the value of the
Prescaler Factor (PCn). For example, if PCn is equal to 1, then every
1 to 0 state transition at the DI will add 1 to CNTRn. If equal to 3,
then three changes from 1 to 0 will add 1 to CNTRn. The
maximum transition rate of DIn is 10 pulses per second (minimum
50 ms ON and 50 ms OFF).
DI: User Name, Via the GX Tool

Description,
Select DIn. Then select Data in the module menu.
Prescaler
At the User Name field, enter the name, which can have a maximum
of eight characters.
At the Description field, enter the descriptive text, which can have a
maximum of 24 characters.
At the Prescaler (counts) field, enter a number between 1 and 255.
Via the SX Tool

Under General Modules, enter the prescaler for each digital input at
Items PC1 (RI.22) to PC8 (RI.29).
DI Notes 1. You can read the DIs status and counter values using the DX front
panel. See Display Panel and Keypads in the DX-9100 Extended
Digital Controller Technical Bulletin.
2. On the SX Tool, the digital input status (DIn), the count transition
status (DICn) and the pulse counter values can be read under
General Modules at the Items given in Figure 4.
DIn The current status of the digital input.
DICn Toggles from 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 when the number of
digital input transitions (counts) equals the prescaler.

None.
Analog Output The DX-9100 Controller has two analog outputs (numbered 1 and 2),
Configuration controlled by two analog output modules, and six digital (triac) outputs
(numbered 3 to 8) controlled by six logic output modules. Versions 2
and 3 of the DX-9100 have an additional six analog outputs (numbered
9 to 14) controlled by six analog output modules.
The analog output module provides the interface between a 0-10 VDC
or 0/4-20 mA hardware output and a numeric value scaled to a 0-100%
range using a high and low range variable.
Each analog output is defined and configured by the following
parameters:
User Name and Description (GX Only)
the type of output
the numeric source
increase/decrease source (if any)
low and high ranges
the Forcing Mode and Level
Hold or Auto on power up
output limits, enable limits
AO: Output Type The output type can be configured as follows:
User Name and Via the GX Tool

Description
Select AOn. Then select Data in the module menu. At the field User
Name, enter the name.
At the Description field, enter the description.
Then enter the output code:
0 = Disabled
1 = 0 to 10 VDC
2 = 0 to 20 mA (not available for outputs 11-14)
3 = 4 to 20 mA (not available for output 11-14)
Via the SX Tool
Under Output Modules, the output type can be configured in Item
AOTn (RI.00). To define the output signal set the bits as follows:
X2 X1 = 00 Output Disabled
X2 X1 = 01 Output 0-10 V
X2 X1 = 10 Output 0-20 mA (not available for outputs 11-14)
X2 X1 = 11 Output 4-20 mA (not available for outputs 11-14)
AO: Source This defines the source of the numeric control signal which drives the
output module. The output module can, alternatively, have two logic
sources; the source of the increase signal and the source of the decrease
signal. The rate of increase or decrease is fixed at 1% per second.
Via the GX Tool

Double-click on the source module and then double-click on the AOn.
Place the mouse on the source point. Hold down the left mouse button
and drag the cursor to the center of AO@. The connection will be made
when the mouse button is released.
If logic variables (Increase/Decrease) are used as a source to drive the
analog output, then the source module and AOn module must be
expanded as described above. Place the cursor on the logic source
point. Press the mouse button and while keeping it pressed, drag the
cursor to INC@ in the AOn module. Release the mouse button to make
the connection. Repeat the same procedure for the DEC@ connection.
Via the SX Tool

Under Output Modules, Item AO@n (RI.01) defines the source of
the numeric control signal. Alternatively, the source of the increase
signal is defined in Item INC@n (RI.10), and the source of the
decrease signal is defined in Item DEC@n (RI.11).
AO: Forcing This defines the source of a logic variable that forces the Analog
Mode and Level Output to a forcing level between 0 and 100%. When the logic source
is 1, the AO will be forced to the % entered in Forcing Level. When
the logic source is 0, the AO will be commanded to position via the
source point.
Note: If a PID is connected to the AO and the AO is forced, the PID
will experience force-back, which means the PID is also in
Hold Mode at this time and its output is forced to the value of
the analog output.
Via the GX Tool
Select AOn. Then select Data in the module menu. At the Forcing
Level (%) = field, enter a number between 0 and 100%.
Double-click on AOn to expand the module. Double-click on the
source module. Place the cursor on the logic source point. Press the
mouse button and while keeping it pressed, drag the cursor to AOF@.
Release the mouse button to make the connection.
Via the SX Tool

Under Output Modules, Item AOF@n (RI.02) defines the source of a
logic variable that forces the output to the forcing level, which is
defined in Item OFLn (RI.05).
AO: Hold or Auto Upon power restoration, the AO can optionally be forced to a Hold
On Power-up (Manual) or Auto (Hold reset) condition, irrespective of the Hold
condition before the power failure and overriding the Initialization on
Power-up setting for the controller and overrides sent from the front
panel or supervisory system.
Via the GX Tool

Select AIn. Then select Data in the module menu. Then enter 1 for
the appropriate power-up condition, if required:
Hold on Power-up = (1 = Yes)
Auto on Power-up = (1= Yes)
If both Hold and Auto are enabled, Hold has higher priority. If both are
disabled, the current setting under the Initialization on Power-up
field determines the output.
Via the SX Tool

Under Output Modules, set Bits X7 and X8 of Item AOTn (RI.00) as
follows:
Bit X8 = 0 The Hold Mode is not altered after a power failure.
Bit X8 = 1 The Hold Mode is set at power-up to the status set
in Bit X7.
Bit X7 = 0 The Hold Mode is set to hold at power-up if Bit X8
is set.
Bit X7 = 1 The Hold Mode is reset (set to 0) at power-up if
Bit X8 is set.
AO: Range The High Range Item (HRO) defines the level of the control source
signal (AOn), which would correspond to an output of 100%.
The Low Range Item (LRO) defines the level of the control source
signal (AOn), which would correspond to an output of 0%.
If LROn < AOn < HROn OUTn = 100 * (AOn - LROn) / (HROn - LROn)%
If AOn <= LROn OUTn = 0% (0 V, 0/4 mA)
If AOn >= HROn OUTn = 100% (10 V, 20 mA)
When the source point is equal to the high range, then the output will
be at the maximum signal (10 V/20 mA). When the source point is
equal to low range, then the output will be at the minimum signal (0 V,
0/4 mA).
Via the GX Tool

Select AIn. Then select Data in the module menu. At the High
Range and Low Range fields, enter the appropriate numbers within
the range of the source signal:
High Range =
Low Range =
Via the SX Tool

Under Output Modules, set the High Range at Item HROn (RI.03)
and the Low Range at Item LRO (RI.04).
AO: Output The output high limit defines the maximum output in percent. The
Limits, Enable output low limit defines the minimum output in percent. These limits
Limits are enabled by a logic connection and are only operative when the logic
source is at 1.
When the limits are enabled:
If OUTn > HLOn
OUTn = HLOn
If OUTn < LLOn

OUTn = LLOn
Via the GX Tool

Select AOn. Then select Data in the module menu. At the High Limit
% and Low Limit % fields, enter the desired number (0-100%). For
Enable Limits, expand both source and AOn modules. Position the
cursor on the source point. Press the mouse button, and while keeping
it pressed, drag the cursor to ENL@. Release the mouse button to make
the connection.
Via the SX Tool
Under Output Modules, set the following:
High Limit on Output = Item HLOn (RI.08)
Low Limit on Output = Item LLOn (RI.09)
The limits are enabled by a logic connection to
Item ENL@n (RI.12).
AO Notes 1. The AO can be read and overridden (placed in hold) from the DX
front panel. See Display Panel and Keypads in the DX-9100
Extended Digital Controller Technical Bulletin.
2. On the SX Tool, the analog output values can be read in percent at
Item OUTn (RI.06) and can be modified when the module is in
Hold Mode.
3. On the SX Tool, Analog output control and status can be seen at
Item AOCn (RI.07) in the following bits:
X1 = 1 OUHn Output in Hold Mode (Manual)
X2 = 1 AOHn Output at High Limit ... 100%
X3 = 1 AOLn Output at Low Limit ... 0%
X4 = 1 AOFn Output is Forced
X6 = 1 OULn Output is Locked (Both INC@n and
DEC@n are true)
4. The analog output module can be set in Hold on the DX front
panel or by the PLC, the SX Tool, a supervisory system, or by
configuration on power-up. See the note on Hold Mode under

AOFn A 1 when an analog output (AO) is being externally
forced.
AOHn A 1 when the analog output is equal to or above its high
range.
AOLn A 1 when the analog output is equal to or below its low
range.
OUHn A 1 when an analog or digital output is in Hold Mode from
either the DX front panel or supervisory system.
OUTn The value of the analog output (including PAT or DAT).
AO@ The numeric connection to control an analog output.
AOF@ The connection to force an analog output to a specified
value.
DEC@ The connection to decrement an analog type output,
PAT/DAT digital type output or a sequencer module. While
connection is a logic 1, the output will decrease at a rate
dependent on the type of module.
ENL@ The connection to enable output limits of an analog type
output (PAT and DAT included).
INC@ The connection to increment an analog type output,
connection is a logic 1, the output will increase at a rate
Digital Output The DX-9100 Controller has six digital output modules that are used to
Configuration control six triacs. The digital output module provides the interface
between a triac output and a numeric or logic variable. The modules
can be programmed as one of five main output types.
Some of the output types drive two consecutive outputs. In that case
the second, consecutive module will be disabled, as it cannot be
executed.
For each digital output module one must define:
the type of output
User Name and Description
For digital output modules defined as PAT or DAT, you must also
define:
the source
increase/decrease source (if any)
the source of the feedback (if any) (PAT only)
the low and high ranges
the Forcing Mode and Level
Hold or Auto on power-up
output limits, enable limits source (if any)
the PAT full stroke time or DAT cycle
the PAT deadband or DAT minimum on/off time
The types of configurations are described next, followed by the steps
needed to configure the outputs.
PAT Position The PAT output type uses a pair of triacs and a numeric source.
Adjust Type Position Adjust Type control is also known as incremental control.
Using High Range and Low Range parameters, the value of the
numerical source is normalized to a 0-100% value and is used as the
required position for the output.
The PAT output may have a physical feedback value signal (0-100%)
from an analog input or other numerical variable. In this configuration
the output module will drive the first triac of the pair (increase or up
signal) as long as the feedback value is less than the required position,
and will drive the second triac of the pair (decrease or down signal) as
long as the feedback value is greater than the required position. A
deadband (in percent) is specified to avoid unnecessary cycling of the
triac outputs when the feedback signal is approaching the required
position, and compensates for any hysteresis or mechanical tolerances
in the driven device.
When the PAT output does not have a physical feedback signal, it
operates on the amount of change in the required position. To
synchronize the PAT output module to the driven device, whenever the
required position goes to 100%, the first triac (increase) will be
switched on for the calculated time and will remain on for the specified
Full Stroke Time of the driven device. Whenever the required
position goes to 0%, the second triac (decrease) will be switched on for
the calculated time and will remain on for the specified Full Stroke
Time. If the required position remains at 100% or 0%, the appropriate
triac will be switched on for the Full Stroke Time every two hours to
ensure that the driven device remains at its end position over an
extended period of time. For all other values of the required position,
the PAT output module calculates the appropriate increase or decrease
time, based on the Full Stroke Time, to bring the driven device from
the last required position to the current required position, and switches
the appropriate triac on for this time. The triac will not be switched if
the change in the required position is less than the specified
deadband. The calculation of the PAT time is performed on each
processor cycle (every second), and the minimum triac on time is 100
msec.
Note: The DX display panel shows the required position value
(OUTn) for the digital output module associated with the first
triac output.
DAT Duration The DAT output type provides a time-based duty cycle output that is
Adjust Type proportional to the value of a numeric source. Using High Range
and Low Range parameters, the value of the numerical source is
normalized to a 0-100% value as is used as the required duty cycle.
For example, with a 25% duty cycle and a DAT cycle time of 600
seconds, the triac output will be switched on for 150 seconds and off
for 450 seconds. At 0% required duty cycle the triac is always off, and
at 100% duty cycle the triac is always on. To avoid short on pulses
when the required duty cycle is close to 0%, or short off pulses when
the required duty cycle is close to 100%, a minimum on/off time may
be specified (in percent of duty cycle). For applications with a short
DAT duty cycle (< 10 sec) it should be noted that the absolute
minimum on or off time of the output triac is 100 msec. The DAT will
always complete a calculated on or off period before recalculating the
next off or on time from the current value of the numeric source. The
DAT recalculates after its on time and after its off time so a full on/off
cycle may not equal the repetition cycle if the numeric source is
changing.
ON/OFF This type provides a single maintained on/off triac output. It can be
driven by either a logic source or numeric source where a positive
value would equal an on and a zero or negative value would equal an
off.
STA/STO This type uses a pair of triac outputs and requires a logic source. A
start command (logic source changes from 0 to 1) sends a one-second
pulse to the first triac of the pair and a stop command (logic source
changes from 1 to 0) sends a one-second pulse to the second triac.
Note: The DX display panel shows the status of the logic source to the
digital output module associated with the first triac output.
This displayed status is also the last command (on or off) to the
triac pair. The display does not indicate the actual triac status.
PULSE This type provides a single momentary triac output from a logic source.
When the logic source becomes a 1, a one-second pulse is sent to the
triac. When the logic source changes to 0, a one-second pulse is sent
to the same triac.
DO: Output Via the GX Tool
Type Double-click on DOn with the left mouse button. Then select one of
User Name and the following: P.A.T., D.A.T., ON/OFF, STA/STO, or PULSE. Select
Description DOn using the right mouse button. Then select Data in the module
menu. Enter the user name and description in the respective fields.
Via the SX Tool

For each digital output module the type of output can be selected with
the following bits under Output Modules in Item DOTn (RI.00):
X3 X2 X1 = 000 Output disabled or paired.
X3 X2 X1 = 001 ON/OFF - driven from a logic source.
X3 X2 X1 = 010 ON/OFF - driven from a numeric source
(< 0 = off, > 0 = on).
X3 X2 X1 = 011 DAT (Duration Adjust Type) output, or time
based proportional duty cycle, driven from a
numeric source.
X3 X2 X1 = 100 PAT without feedback: combination of two
outputs, driven from a numeric source.
Note that the next output is automatically
taken from the next Digital Output Module
in numerical sequence.
X3 X2 X1 = 101 PAT with Feedback: combination of two
outputs, driven from a numeric source with
an associated feedback connection.
X3 X2 X1 = 110 Start/Stop: combination of two outputs
driven from a logic source. This module
gives the start command, and the next digital
output (in numerical sequence) gives the
stop command. Each triac switches on for
one second.
X3 X2 X1 = 111 Pulse Type: the output generates a one-
second pulse for each state transition of a
logic source.
DO: Source This defines the source of the signal that will drive the output module.
PAT and DAT output modules, alternatively to one numeric source,
can have two logic sources: the source of the increase signal and the
source of the decrease signal. The rate of increase or decrease for PAT
type outputs is derived from the full stroke time. For DAT type outputs
the rate is 1% per second.
Via the GX Tool
Expand both source and DOn modules. Position the cursor on the
source point. Press the mouse button, and while keeping it pressed,
drag the cursor to DOn@. Release the mouse button to make the
connection.
Alternatively, for PAT and DAT modules, you can select sources for
increase and decrease. Connections are made in the usual way between
the increase source point and INC@, and between the decrease source
point and DEC@ in the DOn module.
Via the SX Tool

Under Output Modules, the signal source is defined by Item DO@n
(RI.01). PAT and DAT output modules can, alternatively, have two
logic sources. The source of the increase signal is defined in Item
INC@n (RI.13), and the source of the decrease signal is defined in
Item DEC@n (RI.14).
DO: Feedback This defines the source of the analog feedback (0-100%) that is
for PAT needed for the PAT with feedback type module.
Via the GX Tool

Expand the source and destination modules. Position the cursor on the
drag the cursor to FB@. Release the mouse button to make the
connection.
Via the SX Tool

Under Output Modules, Item FB@n (RI.02) defines the source of the
analog feedback.
DO: Range The High Range (HRO) defines the level of the control numeric
(PAT or DAT) source signal which will correspond to the maximum output of 100%.
The Low Range (LRO) defines the level of the numeric control source
signal which will correspond to the minimum output of 0%.
The requested output is scaled to obtain:
OUTn = 100 * (DOn - LROn) / (HROn - LROn) %
Where DOn is the value of the control signal to the module
(source value).
Via the GX Tool

Select DOn. Then select Data in the module menu. At the High
Range and Low Range fields, enter the desired numbers within the
range of the source control signal.
Via the SX Tool
High Range at Item HROn (RI.04)
Low Range at Item LROn (RI.05)
DO: Forcing This defines the source of a logic signal that forces the logic module
Mode and Level output to a forcing level. When the logic connection is a 1, the output
(PAT or DAT) will go to a forced level; when 0, the output will go to normal control.
Via the GX Tool

Select DOn. Then select Data in the module menu. At the Forcing
Level field, enter a number from 0 to 100%.
Expand the source and destination modules. Position the cursor on the
logic source point. Press the mouse button, and while keeping it
pressed, drag the cursor to DOF@. Release the mouse button to make
the connection.
Via the SX Tool

Under Output Modules, Item DOF@n (RI.03) defines the source;
Item OFLn (RI.10) defines the forcing level.
DO: Hold or Auto Upon power restoration, the DO can optionally be forced to a Hold or
On Power-up Auto (Hold reset) condition, irrespective of the Hold condition before
(PAT or DAT) the power failure and overriding the Initialization on Power-up
setting for the controller.
Via the GX Tool

Select DOn. Then select Data in the module menu. Then enter 1 for
the appropriate power-up condition, if required:
Hold on Power-up = (1 = Yes)
Auto on Power-up = (1= Yes)
If both Hold and Auto are enabled, Hold takes priority. If both are
disabled, the current setting under the Initialization on Power-up
field determines the output.
Via the SX Tool
Under Output Modules, set Bits X7 and X8 of Item DOTn (RI.00) as
follows:
Bit X8 = 1 The Hold Mode is set at power-up to the status set
in Bit X7.
Bit X7 = 0 The Hold Mode is set to hold at power-up if Bit X8
is set.
Bit X7 = 1 The Hold Mode is reset (set to 0) at power-up if
Bit X8 is set.
DO: Output The output high limit defines the maximum output in percent. The
Limits (PAT with output low limit defines the minimum output in percent. These limits
Feedback or DAT) are enabled by a logic connection and are only operative when the logic
source is as 1. When the limits are enabled:
If OUTn > HLOn
OUTn = HLOn
If OUTn < LLOn

OUTn = LLOn
Via the GX Tool

Select DOn. Then select Data in the module menu. At the High
Range Limit % and Low Limit % fields, enter the desired numbers
(0-100%).
Expand source and destinations modules. Position the cursor on the
drag the cursor to ENLn@ in the destination module. Release the
mouse button to make the connection.
Via the SX Tool

High Limit on Output = Item HLOn (RI.08)
Low Limit on Output = Item LLOn (RI.09)
The limits are enabled by a logic connection to Item ENL@n
(RI.15).
DO: PAT Full The full stroke time (in seconds) needs to be defined for PAT type
Stroke Time or modules. This is the time it takes the electromechanical actuator to
DAT Cycle drive the controlled device from fully open to fully closed or vice
versa.
The DAT cycle (in seconds) also needs to be defined. This is the
duration adjust time proportion base for a DAT type output.
Via the GX Tool

For PAT, select DOn. Then select Data in the module menu. At the
Stroke Time (sec) field, enter the electro-mechanical actuator stroke
time in seconds.
For DAT, select DOn. Then select Data in the module menu. At the
Repetitn Cycle (sec) field, enter the cycle in seconds.
Via the SX Tool

Under Output Modules, Item FSTn (RI.06) defines the full stroke
time (in seconds) for PAT type modules.
The same Item defines the DAT cycle (in seconds).
DO: PAT The PAT deadband is the change in output value required to initiate
Deadband triac switching in a PAT type output.
DAT Minimum The DAT minimum ON/OFF time defines in percent of cycle the
ON/OFF Time shortest on period when the required output approaches 0%, and the
shortest off period when the required output approaches 100%.
Via the GX Tool

For PAT: select DOn. Then select Data in the module menu. At the
Deadband field, enter the desired number (normally a whole number
between 0 and 5%).
For DAT: select DOn. Then select Data in the module menu. At the
Minimum ON/OFF (%) field, enter the desired number in percentage
of repetition cycle (normally between 0 and 5%).
Via the SX Tool

Under Output Modules, Item DBn (RI.07) defines the PAT
deadband.
The same Item defines the DAT Minimum ON/OFF in % of output.
DO Notes 1. The DOs can be read and overridden (put in hold) from the DX
2. On the SX Tool the output values can be read in percent at
Output Modules, Item OUTn (RI.11). For PAT and DAT type
modules the range is 0-100%. The other types have an output of 0
(off) or 100 (on) percent.
3. Digital Output Control and Status can be seen at Item DOCn
(RI.12) on the SX Tool in the following bits:
X1 = 1 OUHn Output in Hold Mode (manual)
X2 = 1 DOHn Output at High Limit ... 100%
X3 = 1 DOLn Output at Low Limit ... 0%
X4 = 1 DOFn Output is Forced
X5 = 1 AFBn Incorrect Feedback
(The incorrect feedback bit is set whenever
one of the PAT output triacs is switched on
and the feedback signal does not change
within five seconds.)
X6 = 1 OULn Output is Locked (both INC@n and
DEC@n are true)
4. The triac output status can be read on the SX Tool under General
Module, at Item TOS (RI.05).
5. The digital output module can be set in Hold (Manual) on the DX
front panel or by the PLC, the SX Tool, a supervisory system, or
by configuration on power-up. See the note on Hold Mode under

AFB A 1 when the DO PAT associated feedback value is not
responding to changes in the DO PAT command value.
DOn The status of the digital output.
DOFn A 1 when the digital output PAT or DAT is being
externally forced.
DOHn A 1 when the digital output PAT or DAT is at its defined
high limit.
DOLn A 1 when the digital output PAT or DAT is at its defined
low limit.
OUHn A 1 when an analog or digital output is in Hold Mode from
either the DX front panel or supervisory system.
OUTn The value of the analog output (including PAT or DAT).
DO@ The connection to control a digital output.
DOF@ The connection for forcing a digital output to a specified
value.
ENL@ The connection to enable output limits of an analog type
output (PAT and DAT included).
FB@ The connection to the feedback of a PAT. Usually a signal
from a potentiometer on the controlled device.
Constants and There are eight analog constants in the DX-9100. The value of each
Result Status constant can be set by the SX-9120 Service Module, GX-9100
Configuration Software, or supervisory system, and used in an analog
Analog
connection to provide a constant analog value for a programmable
Constants
function module or output module. In a version 2 or 3 controller, the
analog constants may also be set at the DX front display panel. These
values are not located in EEPROM and therefore can be written to via
the supervisory system.
Via the GX Tool

Select PM from the toolbar, and then Analog Constants. An ACO
module (box) appears. Place it where desired on screen. Select ACO.
Then select Data in the module menu. Enter the values as required.
Select OK to reconfirm entries, or CANCEL to discard them.
Via the SX Tool

Under General Module, set Items AC01 - 8 (RI. 34-41).
Digital Constants There are 32 Digital Constants in the DX-9100. The value of each
constant can be set by the SX-9120 Service Module, GX-9100 Graphic
Configuration Tool, or supervisory system, and used in a logic
connection to provide a logic value for a programmable function
module, output module or PLC module. In a Version 2 controller, the
digital constants may also be set at the front display panel. These
values are not located in EEPROM and therefore can be written to via
the supervisory system.
Via the GX Tool
Select PM from the toolbar, and then Digital Constants. A DCO
module (box) appears. Place it where desired on screen. Select DCO.
Then select Data in the module menu. Enter the values as required.
Select OK to reconfirm entries, or CANCEL to discard them.
Via the SX Tool

Under General Module, set Items LCOS1 and LCOS2. (RI.10,
RI.11) LCOS1 is DCO1-16. LCOS2 is DCO17-32.
Logic Result There are 64 Logic Result Status variables in the DX-9100 (In
Status Version 1.0, only 32 are available). The value of each status variable can
be set by the OUT, OUTNOT, SET, or RST instruction of the PLC
module, and can be used in a logic connection to provide a logic value
for a programmable function module, output module or PLC module.
The variables can also be used to transmit status conditions to a
supervisory system. These values are read only and can only be
changed by PLC execution.
Via GX Tool
Select PM from the toolbar, and then select LRS1-32 (or LRS33-64).
A module (box) will appear. Place it as desired on screen. Connections
can be made in the usual way. (See Configuration Tools - Making
Connections earlier in this document.)
Via SX Tool
Under General Module, the logic result status variables can be read
at Items LRST1, LRST2, LRST3, and LRST4 (RI.08, RI.09, RI.44,
RI.45). LRST1 is LRS1-16. LRST2 is LRS17-32. LRST3 is LRS33-
48. LRST4 is LRS 49-64.
Analog Constants, 1. The analog and digital constants can be read and modified
Digital Constants (versions 2 and 3) from the DX front panel. See Display Panel and
Note Keypads in the DX-9100 Extended Digital Controller Technical
Bulletin.

ACOn The current value of an analog constant set by a supervisory
system, the GX Tool, SX Tool, or on the DX front panel.
DCOn The current value of a digital constant set by a supervisory
system, the GX Tool, SX Tool, or on the DX front panel.
LRSn The logic result status of an OUT, OUTNOT, SET or RST
statement in a PLC.
Destination Points
None.
Extension Note: The XTM-905 extension module may be connected to DX
Module controllers, versions 1.4, 2.3, 3.3 or later, and is configured,
Configuration monitored and controlled using the same items as the XT-9100
extension module.
The parameters for the configuration of inputs and outputs in extension
modules reside partly in the DX-9100 Controller and partly in the
XT-9100 or XTM-905 Extension Module.
The parameters required by the DX-9100 Controller are described in
detail in this manual. For details on the extension modules, refer to the
XT-9100 Technical Bulletin or the XTM-905 Technical Bulletin.
Each extension module is defined by the following parameters:
input and output types, and XT/XTM layout map
extension module address
sources (connections) for outputs
high and low ranges for analog outputs
high and low limits for analog inputs
XT/XTM: Type, Via the GX Tool

Mode, and Map
The I/O type and map details are automatically generated by the
GX-9100 Graphic Configuration Software when all I/O data for
extension modules has been entered, and can be downloaded to the
DX-9100 and also to the extension modules when connected to the
DX-9100 via the XT Bus.
Select PM from the toolbar, then XT or XTM and the appropriate
input/output type. A module (box) appears. Place it where desired on
screen. The inputs and outputs for the XT/XTM appear on the left and
right sides of the screen, respectively. Configure each input/output as
appropriate (similarly to DX I/O).
A module labelled XTn or XTMn will be for the points in the first XP
connected to that XT or XTM. If a second XP is connected, the EXP
module must be defined immediately following the first XT or XTM.
An EXPn is always an expansion to the XTn-1 or XTMn-1 module.
Via the SX Tool

The I/O types and map are configured in Extension Module Items,
under XT Modules at XTnIOMAP (RI.00), XTnIOTYP (RI.01),
and XTnIOMOD (RI.02).
The I/O map (XTnIOMAP) defines which inputs/outputs (in pairs) on
the extension module are used and hence monitored or controlled by
the DX-9100. Eight extension modules can be defined, each with eight
used points, which normally reside on the first Expansion Module XP1
(I/O points 1-8), defined in bits X1-4.
When an extension module has a second expansion module, XP2, with
a further eight points, these points must be defined in bits X5-8.
However, in this case, the next extension module in numerical
sequence cannot be configured because the DX-9100 will use the
database area reserved for the I/O points of the next extension module
for the points of XP2 in this extension module. For example, if
Extension Module 1 (XT1 or XTM1) has only one expansion module,
XP1, all the points of XP2 will be declared as not used (bits X5-8 set
to 0) and Extension Module 2 can be configured. However if
Extension Module 1 has two expansion modules and some points in
XP2 are declared as used (one or more bits of X5-8 set to 1), then
Extension Module 2 (XT2 or XTM2) cannot be configured and all its
points must be declared as not used (bits X1-8 set to 0).
The I/O type (XTnIOTYP) defines which inputs/outputs (in pairs) are
analog and which are digital. As the points on XP2 (if used) must be
digital, only bits X1-4 can be configured.
The I/O Mode (XTnIOMOD) defines points as input or output
(in pairs). Only those points declared as used in Item XTnIOMAP
will be monitored or controlled.
The combination of data in the Items XTnIOMAP, XTnIOTYP, and
XTnIOMOD completely defines the configuration of an extension
module. An identical set of data must be entered into the item data
base in the XT-9100 or XTM-905 extension module, so that when the
DX-9100 and XT/XTM are connected and started up, the DX-9100
will compare data bases and only send commands to the extension
module if the data is identical, thus avoiding incorrect control actions.
If the data bases are not identical, Item XTnST, Bit X3 (XTnMIS) will
be set. If the physical hardware of the XT/XTM module does not
correspond to the data base, Item XTnST, Bit X4 (XTnHARD) will be
set.
XT/XTM: The extension module address is set as an eight-bit integer (1-255).

Address, User This address must also be set on the address switches of the extension
Name, module, and must be unique not only on the XT-Bus, but also on the
Description N2 Bus (or Bus 91) to which the DX-9100 is connected. An extension
module address of 0 is not permitted on the XT Bus.
Via the GX Tool

Select XTn. Then select Data in the module menu. Enter the user name
and description in the window which appears. In the Hardware
Address field, enter the address set on the XT-9100 or XTM-905 module
(a number between 1 and 255).
Via the SX Tool

The extension module address is set under XT Modules, in Item
XTnADX (RI.03).
XT/XTM: Source Only output points require a source connection. For analog outputs the
source must define a numeric variable, and for digital outputs the
source must define a logic variable. Inputs and outputs appear on the
left and right sides of the screen, respectively.
Via the GX Tool

Expand source and destination modules. Position the cursor on the
drag the cursor to the destination point. Release the mouse button to
make the connection.
Via the SX Tool

The sources for the points declared as outputs in XP1 of XTn or XTMn
are entered under XT Modules at Items XTnI1@-8@ (RI.04-11).
The sources for the points declared as outputs in XP2 of XTn (if used)
are entered in Items XT(n+1)I1@-8@ in the next extension module
item area (n+1). All points in this next module must already have been
declared unused.
XT/XTM: High For analog outputs, the Analog High Range (AHR) defines the level of
and Low Ranges the source control signal which will correspond to the maximum output
for Analog at the extension module, and the Analog Low Range (ALR) defines the
Outputs level of the source control signal which will correspond to the
minimum output at the extension module.
The value of the output is defined as follows:
100 x ( XTnI XTnALR )
If XTnALR < XTnI < XTnAHR XTnAO =
( XTnAHR XTnALR)
If XTnI < XTnALR XTnAO = 0%
If XTnI > XTnAHR XTnAO = 100%
Where XTnI is the value for the source control signal.
Via the GX Tool

Select the XT analog output point module. Then select Data in the
module menu. Enter appropriate values within the range of the source
signal under both the High Range and Low Range fields:
High Range =
Low Range =
Also enter the appropriate value in the Type of Output field.
Via the SX Tool

Under XT Modules, set the following items:
Analog High Range = Items XTnAHR1-8 (RI.12-26, evens)
Analog Low Range = Items XTnALR1-8 (RI.13-27, odds)
XT/XTM: High The high limit and the low limit define at which levels the analog input
and Low Limits reading will generate an alarm for remote monitoring purposes or for
for Analog Inputs internal use within the control sequences in the DX-9100.
These limits will be automatically downloaded to the extension module
by the DX-9100.
Via the GX Tool

Select the XT analog input point module and choose Active or
Passive. Then click the right mouse button to call up the module
menu and select Data. In the window which appears, enter appropriate
values under both the High Limit and Low Limit fields:
High Limit =
Low Limit =
Via the SX Tool

Under XT Modules, set the following items:
High limit = Items XTnHIA1-8 (RI.28-42, evens)
Low limit = Items XTnLOA1-8 (RI.29-43, odds)
XT Bus Timing The timeout on the XT Bus for the response to a message is set
according to whether XT-9100 or XTM-905 extension modules are
connected.
Via the GX Tool

The timing is set automatically by the GX Tool.
Via the SX Tool

Under General Module, Item DXS1 (RI.32) set the following bits:
X6X5 = 00 XT-9100 extension modules only
X6X5 = 01 XTM-905 extension modules (or both XT-9100 and
XTM-905)
XT/XTM Notes 1. XT/XTM analog input values can be read, and alarm limits read
and modified from the DX front panel. See Display Panel and
Keypads in the DX-9100 Extended Digital Controller Technical
Bulletin.
2. On the SX Tool, analog input values can be read under XT
Modules at Items XTnAI1-8 (RI.45-52). Only those points
configured as analog inputs will be active.
3. Analog outputs can be read and overridden (put in hold) at the DX
4. On the SX Tool, analog output values can be read in percent under
XT Modules at Items XTnAO1-8 (RI.53-60). Only those points
configured as analog outputs, and with the type of output defined,
will be active.
5. On the SX Tool the total pulse count of digital inputs on XP1 can
be read and reset under XT Modules at Items XTnCNT1-8
(RI.61-68). Only those points configured as digital inputs will show
a correct value.
6. Output hold control and status can be seen on the SX Tool under
XT Modules at Items XTnOUH1-8 (bits X1-8 of Item
XTnHDC (RI.69)). Analog and digital outputs can be modified by
a supervisory system when in Hold Mode.
7. XT/XTM digital outputs can be read and overridden (put in hold)
from the DX front panel. See Display Panel and Keypads in the
DX-9100 Extended Digital Controller Technical Bulletin.
8. Digital output control and status can be seen on the SX Tool under
XT Modules at Items XTnDO1-8 (bits X1-8 of Item XTnDO
(RI.70)). Only those points configured as digital outputs will be
active.
9. XT/XTM digital inputs can be read from the DX front panel. See
Display Panel and Keypads in the DX-9100 Extended Digital
Controller Technical Bulletin.
10. Digital input status can be seen on the SX Tool under XT
Modules at Items XTnDI1-8 (bits X1-8 of Item XTnDI (RI.71)).
Only those points configured as digital inputs will be active.
11. Extension module alarm status from analog inputs can be seen on
the SX Tool under XT Modules at Items XTnAIH1-XTnAIL8
(bits X1-16 of Item XTnAIS (RI.44)).
Note: The Alarm Disable connection, described under AI: Alarm
Limits, does not disable XT module alarms. XT/XTM alarms
are only indicated by the AL LED on the DX front panel when
the XT/XTM is selected for display of analog values.
12. Extension module local status can be seen on the SX Tool under
XT Modules at Item XTnST (RI.72) in the following bits:
X1 = 1 XTnCOM XT/XTM module not answering (wrong
address, bus line broken, bus line
overload).
X3 = 1 XTnMIS XT data bases in DX and XT/XTM
do not match.
X4 = 1 XTnHARD XT/XTM hardware failure (XT/XTM
cannot find correct XPs; hardware
missing or not responding).
X5 = 1 XTnSEL XT/XTM selected on XT-Bus.
X6 = 1 XTnERR XT/XTM configuration error
XTnCOM = 1 or XTnMIS = 1
or XTnHARD = 1 (Versions 1.4, 2.3, 3.3
or later)
X7 = 0 XTnFAIL XT/XTM digital outputs set to 0 on
communication failure.
X7 =1 XT/XTM digital outputs hold current
state on communication failure. (Read
from XT module. See the XT-9100
Configuration Guide or the XTM-905
Technical Bulletin for details.)
X8 = 1 XTnPWR XT/XTM detected loss of power or loss
of communication.
Item X8 is automatically reset by the DX-9100 Controller after a
few seconds.

XTnAIn The current value of the analog input from the
XT/XTM.
XTnAIHn A 1 if the analog input is above its high limit and not
below the high limit - limit differential.
XTnAILn A 1 if the analog input is below the low limit and not
above the low limit + limit differential.
XTnAOn The value of the analog output to the XT/XTM.
XTnCOM A 1 when the extension module is not communicating
(wrong address, bus line broken, or bus line overload).
XTnDIn The current status of the digital input from the
XT/XTM.
XTnDOn The status of the digital output to the XT/XTM.
XTnERR A 1 when the XT data base in the DX does not match
the XT data base in the XT/XTM module, or when
XTnCOM is a 1, or when XTnHARD is a 1
(Versions 1.4, 2.3, 3.3 or later). (Combination of errors
for XT/XTM module.)
XTnFAIL The status of the Fail Mode in the XT/XTM. A 0
indicates that outputs go to 0 on communication
failure and a 1 indicates that the status of the outputs
will be maintained.
XTnHARD A 1 when the expansion module is not connected or
not responding (hardware fault), or a module type does
not match what was configured (for example, when an
XP-9102 is configured and an XP-9103 is connected).
XTnOUHn A 1 when an analog or digital output is in Hold Mode
from either the DX front panel or supervisory system.
XTnPWR A 1 when the extension module detects a loss of
power or loss of communication. The DX will reset this
after a few seconds.

AO@ The numeric connection to control an analog output.
DO@ The connection to control a digital output.
Network Analog The controller has 16 network analog input modules, each of which
Input contains a numerical value received from a network analog output in
Configuration another controller on the same LONWORKS N2 Bus. These inputs can
(Version 3 Only) be used in the configuration in the same way as physical analog inputs.
The source of the analog data is defined in the transmitting controller.
User Tag Name For each network analog input module one must define:
and Type
User Tag Name and Description
Network Analog Input Units (SX Only)
Via the GX Tool

Select PM from the toolbar, then Network Analog Input, and place
the NAIn on the screen. Select NAIn and Data. Enter the User Name
and Description in the Data Window. The Units number is
automatically set by the GX Tool.
Via the SX Tool
To configure a network analog input using the SX Tool, it is necessary
to enter the units of the NAI in Item NAInDIM (RI.18 to RI.33) under
NETWORK (Key 8), INPUT MODULES and 2 (NETWORK
AI MOD). There is only one unit used by the DX-912x, which is
number 55. It is also necessary to change Item NAIN (RI.04) under
NETWORK and GENERAL MODULE when the first NAI is
defined. This Item must be set to 1 if any NAIs are used in the
configuration. These Items are automatically set by the GX Tool when
the NAI is created.
NAI Notes
1. On the SX Tool the numeric value of the network analog inputs
can be read at Items NAIn (RI.01 to RI.16) under NETWORK
and INPUT MODULES.
2. On the SX Tool the Reliability Status of each analog input module
can be seen on Bits X1 to X16 at Item NAISTA (RI.17). These
status indications can be used for back-up control strategies in the
case of a transmission failure by using the corresponding logic
variables (NAIU1 to NAIU16) in the PLC. The Reliability Status
will be set to 1 (Unreliable) when the DX controller does not
receive a new value over the network within a period of
approximately 200 seconds.

NAIn The current value of the Network Analog Input.
NAIUn A 1 when the analog input module is unreliable.

None.
Network Digital The controller has eight network digital input modules, each of which
Input contains 16 digital input status values received from a network digital
Configuration output in another controller. Each of the 16 digital values in the digital
(Version 3 Only) input module can be used in the configuration in the same way as
physical digital inputs. The source of the digital data is defined in the
transmitting controller. Digital data is always transmitted in blocks of
16 values from one controller to another and the block cannot be split
apart by the network. Not all 16 values need be used and within the
controller the values can be used quite independently.
For each network digital input module one must define:
Network Digital Input Type (SX Only)
User Tag Name Via the GX Tool
and Type
Select PM in the toolbar, then Network Digital Input, and place the
NDIn on the screen. Select NDIn and Data. Enter the User Name and
Description in the Data Window. The Type number is automatically set
by the GX Tool.
Via the SX Tool

To configure a network digital input using the SX Tool, it is necessary
to enter the type of the NDI in Item NDInTYP (RI.10 to RI.17) under
NETWORK (Key 8), INPUT MODULES and 1 (NETWORK
DI MOD.). There is only one type used by the DX-9100, which is
number 83. It is also necessary to change Item NDIN (RI.03) under
NETWORK and GENERAL MODULE when the first NDI is
defined. This Item must be set to "1" if any NDIs are used in the
configuration. These Items are automatically set by the GX Tool when
the NDI is created.
NDI Notes
1. On the SX Tool the status values of the 16 digital inputs in each of
the eight network digital input modules can be read at Bits X1 to
X16 in Items NDIn (RI.01 to RI.8) under NETWORK, INPUT
MODULES and 1 (NETWORK DI MOD). The status values
can be used in the configuration by connecting the corresponding
logic variables NDIn-1 to NDIn-16.
2. On the SX Tool the Reliability Status of each digital input module
can be seen on Bits X1 to X8 at Item NDISTA (RI.9). These
status indications can be used for back-up control strategies in the
case of a transmission failure by using the corresponding logic
variables (NDIU1 to NDIU8) in the PLC. The Reliability Status
will be set to 1 (Unreliable) when the DX controller does not
receive a new value over the network within a period of
approximately 200 seconds.

NDIn-m The current value of the Network Digital Input.
NDIUn A 1 when the digital input module is unreliable.

None.
Network Analog The controller has 16 network analog output modules, each of which
Output can transmit a numerical value to another controller on the same
Configuration LONWORKS N2 Bus. The network analog output module receives its
(Version 3 Only) value from a connection to a numeric Item in the same controller. Each
network analog output module, if configured, sends its value to up to
16 destinations which are, in fact, network analog input modules in
other controllers on the same network. A maximum of 30 Version 3
controllers can be connected to one LONWORKS N2 Bus.
For each network analog output module one must define:
Network Analog Output Units (SX Only)
up to 16 destinations (controller address and network input module
number)
the source of the output value

and Units
Select PM, then Network Analog Output, and place the NAOn on the
screen. Select NAOn and Data. Enter the User Name and Description
in the Data Window. The Units number is automatically set by the GX
Tool.
Via the SX Tool

When defining a network analog output module, it is necessary to enter
the units of the NAO in Item NAOnDIM (RI.03) under NETWORK
(Key 8), OUTPUT MODULES and 2 (NETWORK AO MODn)
(n = 1-16). There is only one unit used by the DX-9100, which is
number 55. It is also necessary to change Item NAON (RI.02) under
NETWORK and GENERAL MODULE. This Item must contain
the number (0 to 16) of NAOs used in the configuration. These Items
are automatically set by the GX Tool.
NAO Destinations Via the GX Tool

Select NAOn and Data. In the field "Destination #1" enter a
destination controller address (1-255) and a network input number (1-
16) within the destination controller. Continue entering destinations as
required up to the limit of 16. Only enter the address of controllers
which will be connected to the same LONWORKS N2 Bus and use a
network analog input number in a destination controller only once in
the configuration.
Via the SX Tool
Destinations are configured in Items NAOn>1 to NAOn>16 (RI.04 to
RI.19) under NETWORK (Key 8), OUTPUT MODULES and 2
(NETWORK AO MODn) (n = 1-16). Enter the Destination Input
number (NAI) (1-16) and Destination Controller Address (1-255). An
Input number of 0 cancels the destination.
NAO Source Via GX Tool

Expand NAOn to show the input NAOnAO@. Expand the source
module with the desired output numeric Item and make the connection.
The connection source may be seen in the NAO Data Window in the
field Source Point.
Via SX Tool
Connections are defined in Items NAOn@ (RI.20) under
NETWORK (Key 8), OUTPUT MODULES and 2 (NETWORK
AO MODn) (n = 1-16). Enter a numeric Item address.
NAO Note 1. On the SX Tool the numeric value of the network analog outputs
can be read at Items NAOnOUT (RI.01) under NETWORK,
OUTPUT MODULES and 2 (NETWORK AO MODn) (n = 1-
16).
None.
NAOn@ The numeric connection to control a Network Analog
Output.
Network Digital The controller has eight network digital output modules, each of which
Output can transmit 16 digital status values to another controller on the same
Configuration LONWORKS N2 Bus. Each of the 16 digital values in the digital output
(Version 3 Only) module receives its status from a logic variable in the same controller.
Each network digital output module, if configured, sends its 16 digital
status values as a block to up to 16 destinations which are, in fact,
network digital input modules in other controllers on the same network.
A maximum of 30 Version 3 controllers can be connected to one
LONWORKS N2 Bus.
For each network digital output module one must define:
User Tag Name and Descriptor
Network Digital Output Type (SX Only)
up to 16 destinations (controller address and network input module
number)
the sources of the 16 digital status values
and Type
Select PM, then Network Digital Output, and place NDOn on the
screen. Select NDOn and Data. Enter the User Name and Description
in the Data Window. The Type number is automatically set by the GX
Tool.
Via the SX Tool

When defining a network digital output module it is necessary to enter
the type of NDO in Item NDOnTYP (RI.03) under NETWORK (Key
8), OUTPUT MODULES and 1 (NETWORK NDO MODn) (n =
1-8). There is only one type used by the DX-9100 which is number
"83". It is also necessary to change Item NDON (RI.01) under
NETWORK and GENERAL MODULE. This Item must contain
the number (0-8) of NDOs used in the configuration. These Items are
automatically set by the GX Tool.
NDO Destinations Via the GX Tool

Select NDOn and Data. In the Data Window, select Data-2 to go to
page 2. In the field "Destination #1" enter a destination controller
address (1-255) and a network input number (1 to 8) within the
destination controller. Continue entering destinations as required up to
the limit of 16. Only enter the address of controllers which will be
connected to the same LONWORKS N2 Bus and use a network digital
input number in a destination controller only once in the configuration.
All 16 source points will be sent as a block to each destination defined.
Via the SX Tool

Destinations are configured in Items NDOn>1 to NDOn>16 (RI.04 to
RI.19) under NETWORK (Key 8) and OUTPUT MODULES and
1 (NETWORK DO MODn) (n = 1-8). Enter the Destination Input
number (NDI) (1-8) and Destination Controller Address (1-255) An
Input number of 0 cancels the destination.
NDO Sources Via GX Tool

Expand NDOn to show the inputs NDOn-1@ to NDOn-16@. Expand
the source module with the desired output logic variable and make the
connection. The connection sources may be seen in the NDO Data
Window in the fields "Source Bit #1" to "Source Bit #16".
Via SX Tool
Connections are defined in Items NDOn-1@ to NDOn-16@ (RI.20 to
RI.35) under NETWORK (Key 8), OUTPUT MODULES and 1
(NETWORK DO MODn) (n = 1-8). Enter a logic variable index byte
and bit number.
NDO Note 1. On the SX Tool the 16 status values of each of the eight network
digital output modules can be read at Items NDOn (RI.01) under
NETWORK, OUTPUT MODULES and 1 (NETWORK DO
MODn) (n = 1-8).

None.

NDOn-m@ The logic connection to control a Network Digital
Output.
Programmable The DX-9100 provides 12 programmable function modules which are

Function sequentially executed each second. The modules function, inputs and
Module outputs depend on the algorithm assigned to it. The assignment is
Configuration made by programming the module to correspond to the algorithm.
Once the PM is defined to perform a specific function, the remaining
entries of the module can be defined to achieve the desired output.
Parameter Tags Each of the 12 programmable function modules has a set of generic
parameters, each with a PM Tag.
Each of the available algorithms has a specific set of parameters, each
with an algorithm tag (Alg. Tag).
When an algorithm is assigned to a programmable function module, a
parameter has two tags:
one PM Tag, which represents the generic function in the
programmable function module
one Alg. Tag, which represents the specific function of the
parameter in the assigned algorithm
For example, the process variable connection in a PID control
algorithm assigned to Programmable Function Module 1 has a generic
tag, PM1I1@. In Algorithm 1 (PID controller) this same parameter
has the tag PV@. Both tags are listed in the Item list for the
algorithms; one as PM Tag and the other as Alg. Tag.
In the GX Tool, algorithm tags are used exclusively. When mapping
Items to a supervisory system such as Metasys, PM tags are used.
Control The DX-9100 provides four control algorithms:
Algorithm
Configurations
PID Controller
On/Off Controller
Heating/Cooling PID Controller (Dual PID)
Heating/Cooling On/Off Controller (Dual On/Off)
Each of these algorithms can be used in any one of the 12
programmable function modules.
The algorithms have a number of different operating modes, which are
a function of operating parameters and digital connections.
Each control module operates from its working setpoint or WSP,
which is a resultant value calculated by the controller from the
reference variable or RV, the local setpoint or LSP, the remote
setpoint or RSP, the standby mode bias or BSB and the off mode
bias or BOF. The algorithm then compares the Working Setpoint
(WSP) with the Process Variable (PV) to generate an output (OCM).
Comfort Mode (or Occupied Mode) is the working mode of the
algorithm to obtain the desired control typical during occupancy.
The output is calculated by the control algorithm using as working
setpoint the value:
WSP = RV * (LSP + RSP)
This mode is active when both Standby and Off modes are
disabled.
When operating in Standby Mode the controller setpoint may be
reduced or increased when compared with the Comfort Mode
setpoint. The output is calculated by the control algorithm using as
working setpoint the value:
WSP = RV * (LSP + RSP) + BSB
This mode is active, when the standby module control connection is
a logic 1 and the Off Mode is disabled.
The standby bias is a signed number, expressed in the same units
as the PV.
Off Mode (Unoccupied Mode) is similar to the Standby Mode, but
the setpoint may be further reduced or increased. The output is
calculated by the control algorithm using the following function:
WSP = RV * (LSP + RSP) + BOF
This mode is active when the Off Mode control connection is a
logic 1.
The off bias is a signed number, expressed in the same units as the
PV.
In the Off Mode the output low limit of the controller is not used
and the output can fall to 0.
If both Standby and Off modes are active, the control module uses
the Off Mode working setpoint.
Via the GX Tool

Before establishing the mode, you must first set the PM type to Control
and then to the appropriate type. Click on PM in the toolbar, select
Control, then PID, On/Off, Dual PID, or Dual On/Off and position
the module (box) on the screen. Select the module and then Data to
call up the Data Window. Enter control parameters and modes.
To go to page 2, click on Data 2. At Standby Bias (BSB) or Off
Mode Bias (BOF), enter a value to bias the WSP. For Dual PID or
Dual On/Off modules, enter values for each loop at Stdby Bias #1
(BSB1), Off Bias #1 (BOF1), Stdby Bias #2 (BSB2) and Off Bias
#2 (BOF2).
To define the mode connections, expand source and destination
modules. Position the cursor on the source point. Press the mouse
button, and while keeping it pressed, drag the cursor to SB@. Release
the mouse button to make the connection. For Off Mode, make a
similar connection between the respective source point and OF@.
When the connected logic variable is in a 1 state, the value entered will
be used to calculate the WSP of the module. The WSP is always the
active setpoint of the module.
Via the SX Tool

Define the PM type under Program Modules PMnTYP (RI.00):
1 = PID Controller
2 = ON/OFF
3 = Dual PID
4 = Dual ON/OFF
Then set the modes of operation under Program Modules:
PMnOF@ (RI.14) defines the Off Mode control logic connection.
PMnSB@ (RI.15) defines the Standby Mode control logic
connection
BSB1 (RI.30) defines the bias value during Standby Mode in
Loop 1.
BOF1 (RI.31) defines the bias value during Off Mode in Loop 1.
For Dual PID and Dual ON/OFF only:
BSB2 (RI.47) defines the bias value during Standby Mode in
Loop 2.
BSF2 (RI.48) defines the bias value during Off Mode in Loop 2.
The mode status of the controller can be read at Item PMnST (RI.72)
as follows:
X13 = Standby Mode (SB)
X12 = Off Mode (OF)
Remote Mode
In Remote Mode the local setpoint is excluded from the calculation of
the working setpoint, and the WSP cannot be modified from the front
panel of the controller.
Via the GX Tool

Select the defined PMn, then Data in the module menu. At the
Remote Mode: (0 = N) = field, enter 0 or 1:
If 0, the module will calculate from:
WSP = RV * (LSP + RSP) + bias
If 1, the module will calculate from:
WSP = RV * (RSP) + bias
Via the SX Tool

Under Program Modules, select the PID Module and set Bit X8 in
Item PMnOPT (RI.01):
X8 = 0 No Remote Mode.
X8 = 1 Remote Mode enabled.
Min./Max. For the DX-9100, Version 1.1 or later: the calculated WSP value
Working Setpoint cannot lie outside of limits set either by numeric connections or entered
parameters. If there are no connections the values entered at Minimum
Working Setpoint and Maximum Working Setpoint will be used. When
modifying the WSP from the front panel of the controller, it is not
possible to set a value for WSP which lies outside of the set limits.
Via the GX Tool

Select the defined PMn. Then select Data in the module menu. In the
Data Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Minimum WSP
(MNWS) and Maximum WSP (MXWS) fields, enter values to not
exceed for the working setpoint. To use source points for MNWS and
MXWS, connect the respective source points to MNWS@ and
MXWS@. The values of source points will take priority over entered
values.
Via the SX Tool
Under Program Modules, select the PID modules and set the
following:
MNWS@ (RI.22) defines numeric connection for Min. WSP.
MNWS (RI.35) defines the numeric value of Min. WSP.
MXWS@ (RI.23) defines the numeric connection for Max. WSP.
MXWS (RI.42) defines the numeric value for Max. WSP.
Output Forcing Commands from a supervisory system or connections to logic variables
Actions may override the output calculated by the control algorithm, forcing it
to a preprogrammed level of 0 or 1 for On/Off algorithms and 0-100%
for PID algorithms. While forcing is active, the module will stop
calculating until forcing is disabled. Each forcing condition is
associated with an output forcing level. The possible forcing
conditions, ordered in priority, are:
Shutoff Mode (supervisory system only)
Startup Mode (supervisory system only)
External Forcing Mode
The function of each mode may be individually enabled in each control
module.
The configuration of startup and shutoff are also described under
Supervisory Mode Control Settings.
External Forcing With External Forcing Mode, the control module output will assume a
configured forcing level between 0 and 100% for PID algorithms and
of 0 or 1 for On/Off algorithms, overriding the output limits of the
control module.
Via the GX Tool
Expand source and destination modules. Make a connection between
the source point and EF@ in the destination model. When the
connection is a 1, the output will go to the value specified at ExtForce
Out Level (provided Shutoff and Startup are not active).
Select the defined PMn. Then select Data in the module menu. For a
PID module, at the ExtForce Out Level (EFL) field, enter the desired
level as a number in percent of output. For ON/OFF modules at the
ExtForce Out Level field enter 0 for Off and 1 for On.
Via the SX Tool
External forcing is a software connection, which is configured by
entering the source address of the selected logic variable under
Program Modules, at the Alg. Item location EF@ (RI.17) of the
defined PID module.
The forcing level for PID controllers is read and modified at the Item
location EFL (RI.59) of the defined PID module.
The forcing level for On/Off controllers is entered at Item location
OPT, bit X6:
X6 = 1 = On
X6 = 0 = Off
The status of the modes can be seen at Alg. Item PMnST (RI.72)
follows:
X9 = Shutoff Mode (SOFF)
X10 = Startup Mode (STUP)
X11 = External Forcing (EF)
Programmable 1. The WSP, off mode bias, and standby bias can be read and
Module Notes modified by the DX front panel. See Display Panel and Keypads
2. For control module operations refer to algorithms 1-4 in this
document.
3. For details of the Hold Mode and Computer Mode, refer to
Supervisory Mode Control Settings later in this manual.
4. When the PID algorithm is using integral action, forcing actions
will modify the integral term (I Term) such that the internally
calculated output of the control module is equal to the forced
value. This provides bumpless transfer when the forcing is
removed. In other words, when the forcing is removed the output
does not immediately change, but integrates to the new control
output value.
Control The DX executes all modules and all of its calculations once every
Algorithm second. The calculations below assume that the output low/high limits
Theory are 0 to 100.
dxcmb1tb
Figure 5: Control Module Block Diagram
The PID algorithm is defined by the following equations:
Proportional The standard proportional control algorithm is as follows:

Control
Algorithm
P. Output = (100/PB) * Deviation + output bias (OB)
Where:
P. Output = proportional output of control module in %
PB = Proportional Band, defined as the amount of
change in the process variable, that produces a
change of 0 to 100 on the output of the control
module
Deviation = the difference (error) of the Process Variable (PV)
and the Working Setpoint (WSP)
With proportional control, the deviation (or control error) is at zero
only when the output bias value matches the output value required to
attain the set point under the actual load conditions.
Integral Control When using the integral (reset action) in a PID control module, the
Algorithm proportional output is increased or decreased by the integral output
which is determined through the following mathematical relationship:
I. Output(t) = I. Output(t-1) + (Proportional Output * TI *(1/60))
Where:
I. Output(t) = Current integral output
I. Output(t-1) = Previous integral output
TI = Reset Action, expressed in repeats of proportional
control response per minute.
Reset action is used to compensate for the deviation (or error) in
proportional control and reduces the deviation towards zero over time.
The integral computation is stopped as soon as the control module
output calculates its high or low output limits.
An integral time of zero disables the integral action.
The output of a PI algorithm is:
PI Output = P. Output + I. Output
Although the PI Output is normally limited to 0-100, the P. Output and
I. Output can individually be a negative number.
Derivative When using the derivative action (rate action) in a PID control module,
Control the 0-100 output is modified through the following mathematical
Algorithm calculation:
D. Output(t) = [(PV(t) - PV(t-1)) * CD] + (D. Output(t-1) * BD)
Where:
D. Output(t) = Current Derivative Output
D. Output(t-1) = Previous Derivative Output
PV(t) = Current Process Variable in % of input range
PV(t-1) = Previous Process Variable in % of range
BD = (60 * TD) / [4 + (60 * TD)]
CD = 120 * TD * (1 - BD) * 100/PB
TD = Rate Action: a time constant determining the rate
of decay of the derivative output to ensure stable
control.
Rate action is the braking response in case approach to the setpoint is
too rapid and may pass, or the accelerating response in case the
deviation from the setpoint is too rapid and may not be corrected
quickly enough by PI control.
Most commercial HVAC applications will not require derivative
action. A rate action equal to zero disables the derivative term.
The output of a PID algorithm is:
PID Output = P.Output + I.Output + D.Output
Algorithm 01 -
PID Control
Module
Setting These options are a series of parameters which define how the PID
Supervisory Control Module operates and reacts to supervisory system commands.
Control Options For more information refer to Supervisory Mode Control Settings later
in this document.
Via the GX Tool

Select the defined PID module. Then select Data in the module menu.
At the Ena Shutoff: 0=N field, enter a 1 to enable this function.
At the Shutoff Out Level field, enter a value for the output to go to if
Ena Shutoff = 1 and the supervisory system has set Shut off in the
controller.
At the Ena Startup: 0=N field, enter a 1 to enable this function. At
the Startup Out Level= field, enter a value for the output to go to if
Ena Startup = 1 and the supervisory system has set Startup in the
controller.
At the Ena Off Trans: 0=N field, enter a 1 if the module is required
to operate in Off Mode when the supervisory system has set Shutoff
and the process variable is below the Off Mode working setpoint
(WSP). This is only used in reverse acting modules (negative
Proportional Band) for heating applications for low temperature
protection.
Via the SX Tool

These parameters are defined under Program Modules at PM Item
PMnOPT (RI.01) of the PID module, with the following bit structure:
X1 = 1 SOFE Enable Shutoff Mode from Supervisory
System
X3 = 1 STAE Enable Startup Mode from Supervisory
System
X9 = 1 SOTO Enable Shutoff to OFF Change
Process Variable The Process Variable (PV) is an analog value connection to the
Connection PV@ control module. When the process variable is not equal to the setpoint,
the controller responds by changing its output value in accordance with
the PID parameters.
Via the GX Tool
Make a connection between the source point and PV@ in the

destination control module.
Via the SX Tool

Under Program Modules, configure the software connection by
entering the source address of the selected process variable at the PV@
Item (RI.10) location in the defined PID module.
Remote Setpoint The Remote Setpoint (RSP) is an analog variable in the control
Connection RS@ module, in units of PV, which produces a bias in the local setpoint. If
the input is not connected, the controller will use the default value 0.
WSP = RV (RSP + LSP) + bias
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the source point and RS@ in the
Via the SX Tool

Configure the software connection by entering the source address of the
selected remote setpoint at the RS@ Item (RI.11) location in the
defined PID module.
Reference The Reference Variable (RV) is an analog variable to the control

Variable module, which causes the control module to perform as a ratio
Connection RV@ controller. Its effect is a multiplier in the working setpoint calculation.
If the input is not connected, the controller will use the default value 1.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the source point and RV@ in the
Via the SX Tool

The software connection is configured by entering the source address
of the selected reference variable at the RV@ Item (RI.12) location in
the defined PID module.
Proportional The proportional band is a number that defines the action and
Band sensitivity of the control module. A negative number defines a reverse
acting control module; an increase of the process variable produces a
decrease in the output signal. A positive number defines a direct acting
control module; an increase of the process variable produces an
increase in the output signal.
The number itself is an analog input connection (PB@) or value (PB)
that is expressed in percent of the process variable range. When the
process variable is one of the eight analog inputs to the DX-9100
Controller, the PV range is the range of the active analog input or the
control range of the passive analog input. Otherwise, the range defaults
to 0-100 (including all XP analog inputs). The connection is used for
an application requiring a dynamic proportional band, and if this input
is not connected, the controller will use the proportional band value of
PB.
The number itself defines the percentage of the process variable range
change that will produce a full output signal change. For example, if
the process variable has a control range of 0 to 100, a proportional band
of 2% indicates that a change of 2 in the process variable will cause
the control module output signal to change by 100%. If the process
variable range is 0-40, a proportional band of 10% indicates that a
change of 4 in the process variable will cause the control module
output signal to change by 100%.
Via the GX Tool

Select the defined PID. Then select Data in the module menu. In the
Data Window, select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Proport. Band
(PB) field, enter the required value.
Alternatively, make a connection between the source point and PB@ of
the control module.
Via the SX Tool

Under Program Modules, select the PID module. The software
connection is configured by entering the source address of the selected
proportional band at the PB@ Item (RI.13) location in the defined PID
module; or, enter a value for the proportional band at the PB Item
(RI.27) location.
Reverse Action The reverse action connection is a logic input to the control module,
Connection RA@ which changes its action from direct to reverse or vice versa.
If the input is not connected, the controller uses the default value 0 and
the function is disabled such that the defined action in PB is always
used. The reverse action connection should not normally be used
when the controller is configured as symmetric.
The DX front panel will not show that the PB has been reversed by this
connection.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the source point and the RA@ point of the
Via the SX Tool
selected reverse action logic variable at the RA@ Item (RI.16) location
in the defined PID modules.
Output Bias The output bias connection or OB@ is an analog input to the control
module which biases the value of the output. If the input is not
connected, the controller uses the output bias value OB. This option is
normally used in a proportional only control module where the value of
OB determines the output of the control module when the PV is equal
to the WSP.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the source point and the OB@ destination
point.
Data Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Output Bias
(OB) field, enter a value from 0 to 100. In a P only controller, this
will be the output value when PV = WSP.
Via the SX Tool

selected output bias at the OB@ Item (RI.20) location. Alternatively,
enter the output bias value at the OB Item (RI.34) location.
Local Setpoint The local setpoint or LSP is a value which represents the basic
setpoint of the control module. It is a number that should be within the
range of the process variable. The LSP is disabled (ignored) in Remote
Mode. When a WSP adjustment is made from the front panel, it is the
LSP which is actually changed according to the formula below:
Via the GX Tool

Data Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Local Setpoint
(LSP) field, enter the setpoint of the module.
To enable the Remote Mode, enter a 1 at the Remote Mode: 0 = N
field. If 1, the setpoint will be calculated as follows:
WSP = RV (RSP) + bias
Via the SX Tool

Under Program Modules, select the PID module and enter a value for
the local setpoint at the LSP Item (RI.26) location. To enable the
Remote Mode, set Alg. Item REM (RI.01), bit X8 to 1.
Reset Action Reset action or TI is a number which defines the integration time for
proportional-integral type control modules and is expressed in repeats
per period of 1 minute, between 0 and 60, with one decimal place. The
integral time Tn may be computed from this number using the formula:
Tn = 1/TI. Reset action should normally be set to 0 for symmetrical
action controllers.
Note: To clear the reset action from the DX front panel, set the value
to any negative number.
Via the GX Tool

Data Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Reset Action
(TI) field, enter a value between 0 and 60.
Via the SX Tool

the reset action at the TI Item (RI.28) location. A zero number and all
negative numbers will disable the integral action of the controller.
Rate Action Rate action or TD defines the derivative action decay time parameter
and is entered in minutes, between 0 and 5, with one decimal place.
Rate action should normally be set to 0 for symmetrical action
controllers.
Note: To clear the rate action from the DX front panel, set the value to
any negative number.
Via the GX Tool

Data Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Rate Action
(TD) field, enter a value between 0 and 5.
Via the SX Tool

the rate action at the TD Item (RI.29) location. A zero number and all
negative numbers will disable the rate action of the controller.
Output High Limit The high limit or HIL is a number in percent of the output, which
defines a high limit value for the control module output. The default
value is 100, and must always be higher than the low limit.
Via the GX Tool

Data Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Out High Lmt
(HIL) field, enter the high limit in terms of percentage.
Via the SX Tool
Enter the high limit value at Item HIL (RI.36) in the defined PID
module.
Output Low Limit The low limit or LOL is a number in percent of the output, which
defines a low limit value for the control module output. The default
value is 0, and must always be lower than the high limit. The lower
limit is overridden when the control module is in Off Mode and the
output falls to 0.
Via the GX Tool

Data Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Out Low Lmt
(LOL) field, enter the lower limit in terms of percentage.
Via the SX Tool

Enter the low limit value at Item LOL (RI.37) in the defined PID
module.
BOF BOF
Output BSB PB Output PB BSB
100 % 100 %
HIGH LIMIT HIGH LIMIT
(HIL) (HIL)
LOW LIMIT LOW LIMIT Process

(LOL) (LOL) Variable
0% 0%
Off Process Off
Standby Variable Standby
Comfort Comfort
Figure 6: Reverse Acting Figure 7: Direct Acting

Controller (Negative PB) Controller (Positive PB)
Deviation Alarm The deviation alarm values define the values which, when exceeded
Values by the difference between the process variable and the working
setpoint, will automatically generate a deviation alarm.
A low low deviation alarm indicates that the process variable is lower
than the working setpoint by more than the low low deviation alarm
value.
Via the GX Tool

Data Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the
Dev L. L. Limit (DLL) field, enter a value in units of PV.
Via the SX Tool
The low low deviation alarm value can be entered at Alg. Item DLL
(RI.41).
A low deviation alarm indicates that the process variable is lower than
the working setpoint by more than the low deviation alarm value.
Via the GX Tool

Data Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Dev Low Limit
(DL) field, enter a value in units of PV.
Via the SX Tool

The low deviation alarm value can be entered at Alg. Item DL (RI.40).
A high deviation alarm indicates that the process variable exceeds the
working setpoint by more than the high deviation alarm value.
Via the GX Tool

Data Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Dev High Limit
(DH) field, enter a value in units of PV.
Via the SX Tool

The high deviation alarm value can be entered at Alg. Item DH (RI.39).
A high high deviation alarm indicates that the process variable

exceeds the working setpoint by more than the high high deviation
alarm value.
Via the GX Tool

Select the PID. Then select Data in the module menu. In the Data
Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Dev H. H. Limit
(DHH) field, enter a value in units of PV.
Via the SX Tool

The high high deviation alarm value can be entered at Alg. Item DHH
(RI.38).
Note: Except for the PID to P changeover described next, deviation
alarms do not affect the control program operation unless the
associated logic variables are used in other programmable
modules. Deviation alarms do not light the LED on the DX
front panel.
Enable PID to P If a PID control module is in a high high or low low deviation alarm
condition, it will operate as a proportional-only control module when
Enable PID to P is set. The Enable PID to P change on deviation alarm
feature sets the integral term to zero when the process variable is far
from setpoint, and the controller will convert from a PI or PID
controller to a proportional only controller. This is done to prevent
wind-up of the integration term when the process variable is outside of
the normal control range.
PV
HHDA P Only
PI or PID EDB
Integral Term Frozen
WSP Time
EDB
PI or PID
LLDA P Only
pidtop
Figure 8: Enable PID to P
Via the GX Tool

Select the defined PID. Then select Data in the module menu. At the
Ena PID to P: 0=N field, entering a 1 will enable the this feature.
Via the SX Tool

This parameter is defined through Program Modules at PM Item
PMnOPT (RI.01) in the PID module, with the following bit structure:
X7 = 1 PIDP Enable PID to P change automatically on the
Deviation Alarm (LLDA or HHDA).
Error Deadband The error deadband is defined in % of the proportional band PB.
When the process error (PV-WSP) is within this deadband, the integral
term is frozen. The deadband is applied above and below setpoint and
in the units of the PV is equal to:
(EDB/100) * (PB/100) * Range of the PV (AIn)
or
(EDB/100) * (PB/100) * 100 (all other numeric values)
(Figure 8, above, illustrates this function.)
Via the GX Tool
Data Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Err Deadband
(EDB) field, enter the value for the desired error deadband.
Via the SX Tool
The error deadband is entered in Item EDB (RI.33) in the PID Module.
Symmetrical The control algorithm may be configured to operate as a P controller

Transfer Function with a symmetrical transfer function, where the comfort cooling
setpoint is calculated by adding a constant symmetry band to the
comfort heating setpoint and the control module action is reversed.
When the control module is in Standby or Off Mode, there is a shift of
the setpoints as shown in the figure below. For correct symmetrical
operation, the controller must normally be set up as a reverse acting
(heating) proportional controller, with no integral or derivative action,
and the reverse action connection RA@ is not used.
Use this option when you need a single setpoint for two control loops.
Use a dual module for two setpoints.
Via the GX Tool

Select the defined PID. Then select Data in the module menu. At the
Ena Symm Mode: 0=N field, enter 1 to enable this feature.
Then select Data-2 to go to page 2, and at the Symmetry Band
(SBC) field, enter a value to add to the setpoint to determine the
cooling setpoint.
Via the SX Tool

This symmetric operation is enabled under Program Modules at PM
Item PMnOPT, bit X5 (RI.01) in the PID module. The symmetry band
constant is entered at Item SBC (RI.32).
BOF BOF
Output BSB PB PB BSB
100 %
HIGH LIMIT
(HIL)
LOW LIMIT Process

(LOL) Variable
0%
Off SBC Off
Standby Standby
Comfort Comfort dxcgsym
Figure 9: Controller with Symmetric Operation

(Proportional Controller Only)
Notes 1. The output, biases, PB, rate, and reset parameters can be read and
modified from the DX front panel. See Display Panel and
Keypads in the DX-9100 Extended Digital Controller Technical
Bulletin.
2. With the SX Tool, the various outputs of the control algorithm can
be seen at Items OCM (RI.60), WSP (RI.61), PV (RI.62), RSP
(RI.66), and RV (RI.67).
3. The logic status of the control algorithm can be seen at PM Item
PMnST (RI.72) with the SX Tool, with the following bit structure:
X1 = 1 CML Controller Output at Low Limit
X2 = 1 CMH Controller Output at High Limit
X3 = 1 FORC Force-back to OCM from AO is active.
FORC is set when the connected AO
(analog output) is in Hold Mode. The
value of the AO is also forced back, or
set into the OCM, to provide bumpless
override control for a PID module with an
integral action.
X5 = 1 LLDA Low Low Deviation Alarm
X6 = 1 LDA Low Deviation Alarm
X7 = 1 HDA High Deviation Alarm
X8 = 1 HHDA High High Deviation Alarm
X9 = 1 SOF Shutoff Mode Active
X10= 1 STA Startup Mode Active
X11= 1 EF External Forcing Active
X12= 1 OF OFF Mode Active
X13= 1 SB Standby Mode Active
X14= 1 RA Reverse Action Mode
X15 = 0 HEAT (Cooling Controller or PV above center of
SBC in Symmetric Operation)
X15 = 1 HEAT (Heating Controller or PV below center of
Status Items can be used as logic (digital) connections using the
GX Tool or SX Tool.

PMnCMH A 1 when a control modules output is equal to its
output high limit.
PMnCML A 1 when a control modules output is equal to its
output low limit.
PMnCMP A 1 when the control modules WSP is being
overridden by a supervisory system (Computer Mode).
PMnEF A 1 when this control module is being externally
forced.
PMnHDA A 1 when the difference PV - WSP is larger than the
high deviation alarm value.
PMnHEAT A 1 when, in a symmetric control module, the PV is
below the center of the symmetry band, and a 0 when
above center; or a 1 when, in a dual control module,
Loop 1 is active.
PMnHHDA A 1 when the difference PV - WSP is larger than the
high high deviation alarm value.
PMnHLD A 1 when the program module is in the Hold Mode,
being overridden by the SX Tool or a supervisory
system.
PMnLDA A 1 when the difference WSP - PV is larger than the
low deviation alarm value.
PMnLLDA A 1 when the difference WSP - PV is larger than the
low low deviation alarm value.
PMnLSP The value of the local setpoint. (This value is changed
when adjusting the WSP from the DX front panel.)
PMnOCM The value of the PID control module output in percent;
either a 1 or 0 for an ON/OFF control module.
PMnSOF A 1 when this control module is in the Shutoff Mode,
which occurs when enable shutoff = 1 and the
supervisory system has commanded it ON.
PMnSTA A 1 when this control module is in the Startup Mode,
which occurs when enable startup = 1 and the
PMnWSP The value of a control module working setpoint.

EF@ The connection to the external forcing point of control
modules.
MNWS@ The connection to the minimum working setpoint of a
control module. The WSP cannot be adjusted below
this value.
MXWS@ The connection to the maximum working setpoint of a
control module. The WSP cannot be adjusted above this
value.
OB@ The connection of an output bias value of a PID module.
OF@ The connection to the off-mode source point of a control
module.
PB@ The connection to proportional band, which replaces the
value PB if there is a connection.
PV@ The connection to the process variable of a PID or an
ON/OFF.
RA@ The connection to the reverse action point of a control
module.
RS@ The connection to a remote setpoint, which is used in
the calculation for the working setpoint.
RV@ The connection to reference variable which is a
multiplier in the calculation for the working setpoint.
SB@ The connection to the stand-by source point of a control
module.
Algorithm 02 -
ON/OFF Control
Module
Setting These options are a series of parameters which define how the
Supervisory ON/OFF Control Module operates and reacts to supervisory system
Control Options commands.
Via the GX Tool

Select the defined ON/OFF module. Then select Data in the module
menu. At the Ena Shutoff: 0=N field, enter a 1 to enable this
function.
At the Shutoff Out Level field, enter 0 for OFF and 1 for ON. It
will go to the specified state if Shutoff is enabled and the supervisory
system has set Shutoff in the controller.
At the Ena Startup: 0=N field, enter a 1 to enable the function.
At the Startup Out Level field, enter 0 for OFF and 1 for ON. It
will go to the specified state if Startup is enabled, and the supervisory
system has set Startup in the controller.
Via the SX Tool

These parameters are defined under Program Modules at PM Item
PMnOPT (RI.01) of the ON/OFF module, with the following bit
structure:
X1 = 1 SOFE Enable Shutoff Mode from supervisory system.
X2 SOFL 0=0, 1=1 Shutoff out level.
X3 = 1 STAE Enable Startup Mode from supervisory system.
X4 STAL 0=0, 1=1 Startup out level.
the ON/OFF parameters.
Via the GX Tool

Via the SX Tool

selected process variable at Alg. Item PV@ (RI.10) in the defined
ON/OFF module.
Remote Setpoint The Remote Setpoint (RSP) is an analog variable in the control
Connection RS@ module, in units of PV, which produces a bias in the local setpoint. If
the input is not connected, the controller will use the default value 0.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the source point and RS@ in the
Via the SX Tool

selected remote setpoint at Alg. Item RS@ (RI.11) in the defined
ON/OFF module.
Reference The Reference Variable or (RV) is an analog variable to the control

Variable module, which causes the control module to perform as a ratio
Connection RV@ controller. Its effect is a multiplier in the working setpoint calculation.
If the input is not connected, the controller will use the default value 1.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the source point and RV@ in the
Via the SX Tool

selected reference variable at Alg. Item RV@ (RI.12) in the defined
ON/OFF module.
Reverse Action The Reverse Action connection or RA@ is a logic input to the control
Connection RA@ module which changes its action from direct to reverse or vice versa. If
the input is not connected, the controller will use the default value 0
and the function is disabled such that the defined action in ACT is
always used.
Note: When reverse action is a logic 1, the DX front panel PB will not
show that it has been reversed.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the source point and RA@ in the
Via the SX Tool

selected reverse action logic variable at Alg. Item RA@ (RI.16).
Local Setpoint The Local Setpoint or LSP is a value which represents the basic
setpoint of the control module. It is a number which should be within
the range of the process variable. The LSP is disabled when Remote
Mode is enabled. When a WSP adjustment is made from the front
panel, it is the LSP which is actually changed according to the formula
below:
Via the GX Tool

Select ON/OFF. Then select Data in the module menu. In the Data
Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Local Set Pt (LSP)
field, enter the setpoint of the module.
Via the SX Tool

Under Program Modules, select the ON/OFF module and enter a
value for the local setpoint at Alg. Item LSP (RI.26).
Action Mode The action Mode or ACT is a value which defines the action of the
control module. A -1 will define a reverse acting control module; a
decrease of the process variable below WSP will cause the output to
switch to ON (1). A +1 will define a direct acting control module; an
increase of the process variable above WSP will cause the output to
switch to ON (1).
Via the GX Tool

Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Action (ACT) field,
enter 1 or -1.
Via the SX Tool

Under Program Modules, select the ON/OFF module and enter a 1
or -1 as the Action Mode at Alg. Item ACT (RI.27).
Differential The differential or DIF is a number which defines the change in
process variable required to initiate OFF transitions once the output is
ON. It is used to eliminate short-cycling.
Via the GX Tool

Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Differential (DIF)
field, enter the amount of change to cause an OFF transition in the units
of the PV.
Via the SX Tool

Configure the software by entering a value for the selected differential
logic variable at Alg. Item DIF (RI.28) in the ON/OFF module.
PV PV OCM = 1 (PV>WSP)
Value OCM = 0 Value
(PV>WSP+DIF)
WSP+DIF WSP
OCM Maintained
DIF DIF
OCM Maintained
WSP WSP-DIF
OCM = 0
(PV<WSP-DIF)
OCM = 1 (PV<WSP)
Figure 10: Reverse Acting Figure 11: Direct Acting

Controller Controller
Deviation Alarm The deviation alarm values define the value which, when exceeded by
Values the difference between the process variable and the working setpoint,
will automatically generate a deviation alarm.
than the working setpoint by more than the low low deviation alarm
value.
Via the GX Tool

Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Dev L. L. Limit
(DLL) field, enter a value in units of PV.
Via the SX Tool

Enter the low low deviation alarm value at Alg. Item DLL (RI.41).
the working setpoint by more than the low deviation alarm value.
Via the GX Tool
Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Dev Low Limit (DL)
field, enter a value in units of PV.
Via the SX Tool

Enter the low deviation alarm value at Alg. Item DL (RI.40).
working setpoint by more than the high deviation alarm value.
Via the GX Tool

Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Dev High Limit
(DH) field, enter a value in units of PV.
Via the SX Tool

Enter the high deviation alarm value at Alg. Item DH (RI.39).

exceeds the working setpoint by more than the high high deviation
alarm value.
Via the GX Tool

Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Dev H. H. Limit
(DHH) field, enter a value in units of PV.
Via the SX Tool

Enter the high high deviation alarm value at Alg. Item DHH (RI.38).
Note: Deviation alarms do not affect the control program operation
unless the associated logic variables are used in other
programmable modules. Deviation alarms do not light the LED
on the DX front panel.
Symmetrical The control algorithm may be configured to operate as an ON/OFF
Transfer Function controller with a symmetrical transfer function, where the comfort
cooling setpoint is calculated by adding a constant symmetry band to
the comfort heating setpoint and the control module action is reversed.
When the control module is in Standby or Off Mode, there is a shift of
the setpoints, as shown in the figure below. When the controller is
configured as direct action (ACT = +1) the output is at 1 within the
symmetry band (SBC).
Output BOF BOF

BSB DIF DIF BSB
100 %
Process
Variable
0%
Off SBC Off

Standby Standby
Comfort Comfort
dxact1tb
Figure 12: ON/OFF Controller with Symmetric Operation

(ACT = -1)
Via the GX Tool

Select ON/OFF. Then select Data in the module menu. At the Ena
Symm Mode 0=N field, enter 1 to enable or 0 to disable this
function.
If enabled, select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Symmetry Band
(SBC) field, enter a value to add to the setpoint to determine the
cooling setpoint.
Via the SX Tool

This symmetric operation is enabled at Bit X5, PM Type PMnOPT
(RI.01) in the ON/OFF module. The symmetry band is entered at
Alg. Item SBC (RI.32).
Notes 1. The WSP, output, biases, and action mode values can be read and
modified from the DX front panel. See Display Panel and Keypads
2. With the SX Tool, the active values of the control algorithm can be
seen at Alg. Items WSP (RI.61), PV (RI.62), RSP (RI.66),
and RV (RI.67).
3. The output of the control algorithm can be seen at PM Item
PMnDO (RI.71) Bit X1 (Alg. Item OCM).
PMnST (RI.72), with the following bit structure:
X1 = 1 CML Controller Output at 0
X2 = 1 CMH Controller Output at 1
X15 = 0 HEAT (Cooling Controller or PV above center of
X15 = 1 HEAT (Heating Controller or PV below center of
Status Items can be used as logic (digital) connections using the GX
Tool or SX Tool.

output high limit.
output low limit.
forced.
Loop 1 is active.
system.
PMnLSP The value of the local setpoint. (This value is changed
when adjusting the WSP from the DX front panel.)
PMnOCM The value of the PID control module output in percent;
either a 1 or 0 for an ON/OFF control module.
PMnWSP The value of a control module working setpoint.

modules.
this value.
value.
module.
PV@ The connection to the process variable of a PID or an
ON/OFF.
module.
RS@ The connection to a remote setpoint, which is used in
the calculation for the working setpoint.
RV@ The connection to reference variable which is a
multiplier in the calculation for the working setpoint.
module.
Algorithm 03 - The heating/cooling PID Control Module algorithm has two PID
Heating/Cooling control loops, which share the same process variable and control
PID Control output, and have one set of status variables, but have two different sets
Module of tuning parameters. In Version 1.1 or later, two independent control
(Dual PID) outputs are also provided, one for each loop. Only one of the two loops
will be active, depending on the control status:
PV < WSP1 Loop 1 is active.
PV > WSP2 Loop 2 is active.
Abs(PV - WSP1) <= Abs(PV - WSP2) Loop 1 is active.
Note: WSP2 must always be greater than WSP1.
Setting The options are a series of parameters which define how the PID
Options
Via the GX Tool
Click on PM in the toolbar, select Control, then Dual PID, and
position the module (box) on the screen. Select the module and then
Data to call up the Data Window. At the Ena Shutoff: 0=N field,
enter a 1 to enable this function.
At the Shutoff Out Level field, enter a value for the output to go to if
Shutoff is enabled and the supervisory system has set Shutoff in the
controller.
At the Startup Out Level field, enter a value for the output to go to if
Startup is enabled and the supervisory system has set Startup in the
controller.
At the Ena Trans: 0=N field, enter a 1 so the module will operate
in Off Mode if the supervisory system has set Shutoff and the
process variable is below the Off Mode WSP. This is only used in a
reverse acting loop (negative Proportion Band) for heating applications
for low temperature protection.
Via the SX Tool

These parameters are defined under Program Module at PM Item
PMnOPT (RI.01) in the DUAL PID module, with the following bit
structure:
X1 = 1 SOFE Enable Shutoff Mode from supervisory system
X3 = 1 STAE Enable Startup Mode from supervisory system
X9 = 1 SOTO Enable Shutoff to OFF change
PV@ control module. When the process variable is not equal to the setpoint,
the PID parameters.
Via the GX Tool

Via the SX Tool

selected process variable under Program Modules at Alg. Item PV@
(RI.10) in the defined DUAL PID module.
Remote Setpoint Each of the two remote setpoints (RSP1, RSP2) is an analog variable
RS1@, RS2@ in the control module, in units of PV, which produces a bias in the
respective local setpoint. If the input is not connected, the controller
will use the default value 0.
WSPn = RVn (RSPn + LSPn) + (bias)n n = 1,2
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the source point and RS1@ in the
destination control module. Make a connection between the source
point and RS2@ in the destination control module.
Via the SX Tool

selected remote setpoints under Program Modules at Alg. Items
RS1@ (RI.11) and RS2@ (RI.18) in the defined DUAL PID module.
Reference Each of the two reference variables (RV1, RV2) is an analog input to
Variables RV1@, the control module, which causes the respective loop in the control
RV2@ module to perform as a ratio controller. Its effect is a multiplier in the
working setpoint calculation. If the input is not connected, the
controller will use the default value 1.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the source point and RV1@ in the
point and RV2@ in the destination control module.
Via the SX Tool
selected reference variables under Program Modules at Alg. Item
RV1@ (RI.12) and RV2@ (RI.19) in the defined DUAL PID module.
Proportional The proportional band is a number that defines the action and
Band sensitivity of the control module. A negative number defines a reverse
acting control module; an increase of the process variable produces a
decrease in the output signal. A positive number defines a direct acting
control module; an increase of the process variable produces an
increase in the output signal.
The number itself is an analog input connection (PB@) or value (PB1
or PB2) that is expressed in percent of the process variable range.
When the process variable is one of the eight analog inputs to the DX-
9100 Controller, the PV range is the range of the analog input.
Otherwise, the range defaults to 0-100 (including all XP analog inputs).
The connection is used for an application requiring a dynamic
proportional band and if this input is not connected, the controller will
use the proportional band value of PB1 or PB2.
The number itself defines the percentage of the process variable range
change that will produce a full output signal change. For example, if
the process variable has a control range of 0 to 100, a proportional band
of 2% indicates that a change of 2 in the process variable will cause
the control module output signal to change by 100%. If the process
variable range is 0-40, a proportional band of 10% indicates that a
change of 4 in the process variable will cause the control module
output signal to change by 100%.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the source point and PB1@ in the
point and PB2@ in the destination control module.
Alternately, select the defined Dual PID. Then select Data in the
module menu. In the Data Window select Data-2 to go to page 2. At
the Proport. Band (PB1) and Proport. Band (PB2) fields, enter the
required values.
Via the SX Tool

Under Program Modules, select the DUAL PID module. The
software connection is configured by entering the source addresses of
the selected proportional band at Alg. Items PB1 (RI.27) and PB2
(RI.44); or, enter a value for the proportional bands at the PB Items
(RI.27, RI.44) location.
Reverse Action The reverse action connection is a logic input to the control module,
Connection RA@ which changes the action of both controllers from direct to reverse or
vice versa. Extreme caution is advised when using this connection
when setpoint biases are also being used as the sign of the biases is not
reversed. For correct controller operation, WSP2 must always be
greater than WSP1.
If the input is not connected, the controller will use the default value 0
and the function is disabled such that the defined action in PB@, PB1
or PB2 is always used.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the source point and the RA@ point of the
Via the SX Tool

selected reverse action logic variable under Program Modules at Alg.
Item RA@ (RI.16) in the defined DUAL PID module.
Output Bias Each of the two output bias connections (OB1@, OB2@) is an analog
input to the respective loop of the control module which biases the
value of the output. If the input is not connected, the controller will
use the output bias value OB1 or OB2. This option is normally used in
a proportional only control module where the value of OBn determines
the output of the respective control module when the PV is equal to the
WSP.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the source point and the OB1@ point of
the destination control module. Make a connection between the source
point and the OB2@ destination point.
Select Dual PID. Then select Data in the module menu. In the Data
Window, select Data-2 to go to page 2. Enter a value at:
Output Bias #1 (OB1)
Output Bias #2 (OB2)
Via the SX Tool

selected output bias at Items OB1@ (RI.20) and OB2@ (RI.21).
Alternatively, the internal output bias values are set under Program
Modules at Alg. Items OB1 (RI.34) or OB2 (RI.50).
Local Setpoint Each of the two local setpoints is a value which represents the basic
setpoint of the respective loop in the control module. It is a number
which should be within the range of the process variable. LSP1 and
LSP2 are disabled when Remote Mode is enabled. When a WSP1 or
WSP2 is adjusted from the front panel, the respective LSP is changed
according to the formula below:
WSPn = RVn (RSPn + LSPn) + (bias)n n=1,2
Via the GX Tool

Window, select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Local SP #1 (LSP1)
and Local SP #2 (LSP2) fields, enter a value in units of PV.
Via the SX Tool

Under Program Modules, select the DUAL PID module and enter
values for the local setpoints at Alg. Items LSP1 (RI.26) and
LSP2 (RI.43).
Reset Actions Each of the two reset actions is a number which defines the integration
time for proportional-integral type control modules and is expressed in
repeats per period of 1 minute, between 0 and 60. The integral time Tn
may be computed from this number using the formula: Tn = 1/TI.
Note: The integral term of each control loop is frozen when the loop
becomes inactive and therefore determines the initial output of
the loop when it again becomes active.
Via the GX Tool

Window, select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Reset Action #1
(TI1) and Reset Action #2 (TI2) fields, enter a value.
Via the SX Tool

Enter a value for the selected reset actions under Program Modules at
Alg. Items TI1 (RI.28) or TI2 (RI.45).
Rate Actions Each of the two rate actions defines the derivative action decay time
value and is entered in minutes, between 0 and 5.
Via the GX Tool

Window, select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Rate Action #1
(TD1) and Rate Action #2 (TD2) fields, enter a value.
Via the SX Tool
Enter a value for the selected rate actions under Program Modules at
Alg. Items TD1 (RI.29) or TD2 (RI.46).
Output High Each of the two high limits is a number in percent of the output, which
Limits defines a high limit value for the control module output in the
respective loop. The default value is 100 for each limit, and must
always be higher than the low limit.
Via the GX Tool

Window, select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Out H Lmt #1
(HIL1) and Out H Lmt #2 (HIL2) fields, enter a value.
Via the SX Tool

Enter a value for the selected high limit under Program Modules at
Alg. Items HIL1 (RI.36) and HIL2 (RI.53).
Output Low Each of the two low limits is a number in percent of the output, which
Limits defines a low limit value for the control module output in the
respective loop. The default value is 0 for each limit, and must always
be lower than the high limit. The low limits are overridden when the
control module is in Off Mode and the output falls to 0.
Via the GX Tool

Window, select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Out L Lmt #1
(LOL1) and Out L Lmt #2 (LOL2) fields, enter a value.
Via the SX Tool
Enter a value for the selected low limit under Program Modules at
Alg. Items LOL1 (RI.37) and LOL2 (RI.54).
BOF1 BOF2
Output BSB1 BSB2
PB1 PB2
100 %
HIL2
HIL1
Process
LOL1
LOL2 Variable
0%
Off Off
Standby Standby
Comfort Comfort dxpidmtb
Figure 13: Heating/Cooling Module Operation
Values the difference between the process variable and the actual working
than the working setpoint of the respective loop by more than the low
Via the GX Tool

Window, select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Dev LL Lmt #1
(DLL1) and Dev LL Lmt #2 (DLL2) fields, enter a value in units of
PV.
Via the SX Tool

The low low deviation alarm value for the respective loop can be
entered under Program Modules at Alg. Item DLL1 (RI.41) and
DLL2 (RI.58).
the working setpoint of the respective loop by more than the low
deviation alarm value.
Via the GX Tool
Window, select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Dev L Lmt #1 (DL1)
and Dev L Lmt #2 (DL2) fields, enter a value in units of PV.
Via the SX Tool

The low deviation alarm value for the respective loop can be entered
under Program Modules at Alg. Item DL1 (RI.40) and DL2 (RI.57).
working setpoint of the respective loop by more than the high deviation
alarm value.
Via the GX Tool

Window, select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Dev H Lmt #1 (DH1)
and Dev H Lmt #2 (DH2) fields, enter a value in units of PV.
Via the SX Tool

The high deviation alarm value for the respective loop can be entered
under Program Modules at Alg. Item DH1 (RI.39) and DH2 (RI.56).

exceeds the working setpoint of the respective loop by more than the
Via the GX Tool

Window, select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Dev HH Lmt #1
(DHH1) and Dev HH Lmt #2 (DHH2) fields, enter a value in units
of PV.
Via the SX Tool

The high high deviation alarm value for the respective loop can be
entered under Program Modules at Alg. Item DHH1 (RI.38) and
DHH2 (RI.55).
Note: Except for the PID to P changeover described below, deviation
alarms do not affect the control program operation unless the
associated logic variables are used in other programmable
modules. Deviation alarms do not light the LED on the DX
front panel.
Enable PID to P If a PID control loop has a high high or low low deviation alarm, it will
operate as a proportional only loop when the PID to P feature is
enabled. (Refer to the Figure 7: Enable PID to P diagram under
Algorithm 01 - PID Control Module section.)
Via the GX Tool

Select DUAL PID. Then select Data in the module menu. At the Ena
PID to P: 0=N field, enter 1 to enable PID to P transition, or 0 to
disable this feature.
Via the SX Tool

This feature is enabled when Alg. Item PIDP (RI.01) Bit X7 is set to 1
under Program Modules.
Error Deadband The error deadband is expressed in percent of the active proportional
band PB1 or PB2. When the process error (PV-WSP) is within this
deadband, the integral term is frozen. The deadband is applied above
and below setpoint and in the units of the PV is equal to:
(EDB/100) * (PB/100) * Range of the PV (AIn)
or
(EDB/100) * (PB/100) * 100 (all other numeric values)
Refer to Figure 8 above.
Via the GX Tool

Window, select Data-2 to go to page 2. At the Err Dd Bnd #1
(EDB1) and Err Dd Bnd #2 (EDB2) fields, enter a value in percent
of PB.
Via the SX Tool

The error deadbands are entered under Program Modules at Alg.
Items EDB1 (RI.33) and EDB2 (RI.49).
Enable Zero When this option is enabled, the changeover from one loop to another
Output will only take place when the output of the active loop is at its low
Changeover limit. This feature is used when the control loops have integral or
derivative action and the process variable can change very quickly. It
prevents a loop becoming inactive when its output is above the low
limit value due to the integral or derivative term.
When this option is not enabled, the output of the loop will go to its
low limit when the loop becomes inactive, and when the loop becomes
active again the output will immediately return to the value at the time
of the previous changeover. This may cause unnecessary instability.
When a long integral time is configured, the effect of enabling this
option will be to slow down the change-over from heating to cooling or
vice-versa when the process variable changes rapidly. The changeover
cannot occur until the integral and derivative terms have decayed such
that the output is at the low limit value.
Via the GX Tool

Select the module and then Data to call up the Data Window.
At the Ena zero c/o: 0=N field, enter a 1 to enable this function.
Via the SX Tool

This parameter is defined under Program Module at PM Item
PMnOPT (RI.01) in a DUAL PID module as follows:
X10 = 1 EZCO Enable Zero Output Changeover
Notes 1. The WSP1, WSP2, PB1, PB2, OCM, PV, TI1, TI2, TD1, TD2,
BOF1, BOF2, BSB1, and BSB2 can be read and modified from the
DX front panel. See Display Panel and Keypads in the DX-9100
be seen at Alg. Items OCM (RI.60), WSP1 (RI.61), WSP2
(RI.62), PV (RI.63), RSP (RI.66), RV (RI.67), OCM1 (RI.68),
and OCM2 (RI.69).
OCM represents the output of the active loop. OCM1 and OCM2,
which are only available for Version 1.1 and later, represent the
outputs of loops 1 and 2, respectively.
PMnST (RI.72), with following bit structure:
X1 = 1 CML Controller Output at Low Limit
X2 = 1 CMH Controller Output at High Limit
X3 = 1 FORC Force-back to OCM from AO is active.
FORC is set when the connected AO
(analog output) is in Hold Mode. The
value of the AO is also forced back, or
set into the OCM, to provide bumpless
override control for a PID module with an
integral action.
Force-back is not active when the AO is
connected to OCM1 or OCM2.
X15= 0 HEAT Cooling (Loop 2 active) (PV above WSP2)
X15= 1 HEAT Heating (Loop 1 active) (PV below WSP1)
Tool or SX Tool.
output high limit.
output low limit.
forced.
Loop 1 is active.
system.
PMnLSP1 The value of the local setpoint of Loop 1 of a dual
control module. (This value is directly changed when
adjusting the WSP1 from the DX front panel.)
control module. (This value is changed when adjusting
the WSP2 from the DX front panel.)
PMnMNWS The value of the minimum working setpoint allowed for
a control module.
PMnMXWS The value of the maximum working setpoint allowed for
a control module.
PMnOCM The value of the dual PID control module output in
percent.
PMnOCM1 The value of the Loop 1 output in a dual PID control
module in percent.
PMnOCM2 The value of the Loop 2 output in a dual PID control
module in percent.
PMnWSP1 The value of the working setpoint of Loop 1 of a dual
control module.
control module.

modules.
this value.
value.
OB1@ The connection for Loop 1 of a dual PID output bias.
OB2@ The connection for Loop 2 of a dual PID output bias.
OF@ The connection to the off-Mode source point of a control
module.
PB@ The connection to proportional band, which replaces the
value PB if there is a connection.
PV@ The connection to the process variable of a control
module.
module.
RS1@ The connection for Loop 1 of a dual control module
remote setpoint.
remote setpoint.
RV1@ The connection for Loop 1 of a dual control module
reference variable.
reference variable.
module.
Algorithm 04 - The heating/cooling ON/OFF algorithm has two ON/OFF Control
Heating/ loops which share the same process variable and control output, and
Cooling ON/OFF have one set of status variables, but have two different sets of tuning
Control Module parameters. In Version 1.1 or later, two independent control outputs are
(Dual ON/OFF) also provided, one for each loop. Only one of the two loops will be
active, depending on the control status:
PV < = WSP1 Loop 1 is active.
PV > = WSP2 Loop 2 is active.
Abs(PV - WSP1) < = Abs(PV - WSP2) Loop 1 is active.
Note: WSP2 must always be greater than WSP1.
Setting The options are series of parameters which define how the ON/OFF
Control Options
Via the GX Tool
Click on PM in the toolbar, select Control, then Dual On/Off and
Data to call up the Data Window. At the Ena Shutoff: 0=N field,
enter a 1 to enable this function.
At the Shutoff Out Level field, enter 0 for OFF and 1 for ON. It
will go to the specified state if Shutoff is enabled and the supervisory
system has set Shutoff in the controller.
At the Startup Out Level field, enter 0 for OFF and 1 for ON. It
will go to the specified state if Startup is enabled and the supervisory
system has set Startup in the controller.
Via the SX Tool

These parameters are defined under Item PMnOPT (RI.01) of the
D ON/OFF module, with the following bit structure:
X1 = 1 SOFE Enable Shutoff Mode from Supervisory
System
X2 SOFL 0=0, 1=1 Shutoff out level
X3 = 1 STAE Enable Startup Mode from Supervisory
System
X4 STAL 0=0, 1=1 Startup out level
the ON/OFF parameters.
Via the GX Tool

Via the SX Tool

selected process variable under Program Modules at Item PV@
(RI.10) in the defined D ON/OFF module.
Remote Setpoint Each of the two remote setpoints (RSP1, RSP2) is an analog variable
Connections to the control module, in units of the PV, which produces a bias in the
RS1@, RS2@ respective local setpoint. If the input is not connected, the controller
will use the default value 0.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the source point and RS1@ in the
point and RS2@ destination point.
Via the SX Tool

Configure the software connection by entering the source addresses of
the selected remote setpoint under Program Modules at Alg. Items
RS1@ (RI.11) and RS2@ (RI.18).
Reference Each of the two reference variables (RV1, RV2) is an analog input to
Variable the control module, which causes the respective loop in the control
Connection module to perform as a ratio controller. Its effect is a multiplier in the
RV1@, RV2@ working setpoint calculation. If the input is not connected, the
controller will use the default value 1.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the source point and RV1@ in the
point and RV2@ destination point.
Via the SX Tool
Configure the software connection by entering the source addresses of
the selected reference variable under Program Modules at Alg. Items
RV1@ (RI.12) and RV2@ (RI.19).
Reverse Action The reverse action connection is a logic input to the control module
Connection RA@ which changes the action of both controllers from direct to reverse or
vice versa. Extreme caution is advised when using this connection
when setpoint biases are also being used as the sign of the biases is not
reversed. For correct controller operation, WSP2 must always be
greater than WSP1.
If the input is not connected, the controller will use the default value 0
and the function is disabled such that the defined action in ACT1 or
ACT2 is always used.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the source point and RA1@ in the
Via the SX Tool

selected reverse action logic variable under Program Modules at Alg.
Item RA@ (RI.16).
Local Setpoint Each of the two local setpoints is a value which represents the basic
setpoint of the respective loop in the control module. It is a number
which should be within the range of the process variable. The LSP1
and LSP2 are disabled when remote Mode is enabled. When a WSP1
or WSP2 is adjusted from the front panel, the respective LSP is
changed according to the formula below:
WSPn = RVn (RSPn + LSPn) + (bias)n n=1,2
Via the GX Tool

Data to call up the Data Window. At the Local SP #1 (LSP1) and
Local SP #2 (LSP2) fields, enter setpoint values.
Via the SX Tool

Enter a value for the selected local setpoints under Program Modules
at Alg. Items LSP1 (RI.26) and LSP2 (RI.43).
Action Modes Each of the two action modes defines the action of the respective loop
in the control module. A -1 will define a reverse acting control
module; an increase of the process variable will cause the output to
switch to OFF (0). A +1 will define a direct acting control module;
an increase of the process variable will cause the output to switch to
ON (1). ACT 1 will normally be -1 and ACT 2 will normally be
+1 to define a heating/cooling controller.
Via the GX Tool

Data to call up the Data Window. Go to the second page. At the
Action #1 (ACT1) and Action #2 (ACT2) fields, enter a value.
Via the SX Tool

Enter -1 or +1 for the selected Action Mode under Program
Modules at Alg. Items ACT1 (RI.27) and ACT2 (RI.44).
Differential Each of the two differential values is a number which defines the
change in deviation value required to initiate OFF transitions once
outputs are ON.
Via the GX Tool

Data to call up the Data Window. At the Diffrntial #1 (DIF1) and
Diffrntial #2 (DIF2) fields, enter the amount of change to cause an
OFF transition in units of the PV.
Via the SX Tool

Enter a value for the selected differential under Program Modules at
Alg. Items DIF1 (RI.2) or DIF2 (RI.45).
Output BOF1 BOF2

BSB1 DIF1 DIF2 BSB2
100 %
Process
0% Variable
Off Off
Standby
Standby
Comfort Comfort dxact2tb
Figure 14: Heating/Cooling ON/OFF Module Operation
Values the difference between the process variable and the actual working
than the working setpoint of the respective loop by more than the low
Via the GX Tool

Data to call up the Data Window. At the Dev LL Lmt #1 (DLL1) and
Dev LL Lmt #2 (DLL2) fields, enter a value in units of PV.
Via the SX Tool

The low low deviation alarm value for the respective loop can be
entered under Program Modules at Alg. Item DLL1 (RI.41) and
DLL2 (RI.58).
the working setpoint of the respective loop by more than the low
deviation alarm value.
Via the GX Tool

Data to call up the Data Window. At the Dev Low Lmt #1 (DL1)
and Dev Low Lmt #2 (DL2) fields, enter a value in units of PV.
Via the SX Tool

The low deviation alarm value for the respective loop can be entered
under Program Modules at Alg. Item DL1 (RI.40) and DL2 (RI.57).
working setpoint of the respective loop by more than the high deviation
alarm value.
Via the GX Tool

Data to call up the Data Window. At the Dev H Lmt #1 (DH1) and
Dev H Lmt #2 (DH2) fields, enter a value in units of PV.
Via the SX Tool
The high deviation alarm value for the respective loop can be entered
under Program Modules at Alg. Item DH1 (RI.39) and DH2 (RI.56).

exceeds the working setpoint of the respective loop by more than the
Via the GX Tool

Data to call up the Data Window. At the Dev HH Lmt #1 (DHH1)
and Dev HH Lmt #2 (DHH2) fields, enter a value in units of PV.
Via the SX Tool

The high high deviation alarm value for the respective loop can be
entered under Program Modules at Alg. Item DHH1 (RI.38) and
DHH2 (RI.55).
Note: Deviation alarms do not affect the control program operation
unless the associated logic variables are used in other
programmable modules. Deviation alarms do not light the LED
on the DX front panel.
Notes 1. The WSP1, WSP2, PV, OCM, ACT1, DIF1, BOF1, BSB1, ACT2,
DIF2, BOF2, and BSB2 can be read and modified from the DX
be seen under Program Modules at Alg. Items WSP1 (RI.61),
WSP2 (RI.62), PV (RI.63), RSP (RI.66) and RV (RI.67).
3. The output of the control algorithm can be seen under Program
Modules at PM Item PMnDO (RI.71). OCM represents the
output of the active loop. OCM1 and OCM2, which are only
available from Version 1.1 and later, represent the outputs of loops
1 and 2, respectively:
OCM = Bit X1
OCM1 = Bit X2
OCM2 = Bit X3
PMnST (RI.72) with following bit structure:
X1 = 1 CML Controller Output at 0
X2 = 1 CMH Controller Output at 1
X15= 0 HEAT Cooling (Loop 2 active)
X15= 1 HEAT Heating (Loop 1 active)
GX Tool or SX Tool.

output high limit.
output low limit.
forced.
system.
control module. (This value is directly changed when
adjusting the WSP1 from the DX front panel.)
control module. (This value is changed when adjusting
the WSP2 from the DX front panel.)
PMnOCM The value of the dual ON/OFF control module output;
either a 1 or 0
PMnOCM1 The value of the Loop 1 output in a dual ON/OFF
control module; either a 1 or 0.
PMnOCM2 The value of the Loop 2 output in a dual ON/OFF
control module; either a 1 or 0.
control module.
control module.

modules.
this value.
value.
module.
PV@ The connection to the process variable of a control
module.
module.
remote setpoint.
remote setpoint.

reference variable.
reference variable.
module.
Numerical Each of the 12 programmable function modules can be defined as a

Calculation and numeric calculation module or other type of control module, capable of
Other Function executing a mathematical or control algorithm.
Module Each module can accept numeric and logic variable inputs and each
Configurations module provides a numeric and/or logic output which can be connected
to either a programmable function module or output module.
Algorithm 11 - The average algorithm calculates the arithmetic average of up to eight

Average connected inputs. If one of the inputs is not connected, the calculation
module will assume a value of 1 for the corresponding variable.
Each input may be weighted with a constant K.
I1 x K1 + I 2 x K 2 + ... + I 8 x K 8)
K0
In@ = Input Variable Connection n = 1-8
Kn = Constant n = 0-8
Note: If K0 = 0, the average module will not update its output.
Via the GX Tool

Click on PM in the toolbar, select Numeric, then Average and
position the module (box) on the screen. Make connections between
source points and destination points In@, as applicable. Select the
module (box) on screen and then Data to call up the Data Window.
Under #0 through #8, enter appropriate values to complete the
calculation.
Via the SX Tool

An Average Calculation Algorithm of a DX-9100 Controller is
assigned to a programmable function module when the value 11 is
configured, under Program Modules, in PM Item PMnTYP (RI.00).
To connect to the Input Variable Connection, enter the source
addresses at Alg. Item In@, (RI.10 - RI.17).
Enter the values for the constants at Alg. Item Kn, (RI.26 - RI.34).

High/Low Limits The output of the module is limited by the high and low limits. Use
these limits to keep the output within a reasonable range in case of the
failure of an input.
Via the GX Tool

Select the average module on screen and then Data to call up the Data
Window. Enter a value at the High Limit and Low Limit fields.
If the calculation > high limit, then NCM = high limit
If the calculation < low limit, then NCM = low limit
Via the SX Tool

The low limit value is entered under Program Modules at Alg. Item
LOL (RI.37) and the high limit at Alg. Item HIL (RI.36).
Notes 1. On the SX Tool, the output of the algorithm can be seen under
Program Modules at Alg. Item NCM (RI.60).
2. The logical status of the algorithm can be seen on the SX Tool
under Program Modules at PM Item PMnST (RI.72), with
following bit structure:
X1 = 1 NML Calculated Output is at Low Limit
X2 = 1 NMH Calculated Output is at High Limit
3. The module can be put in Hold Mode by entering the value 1 in
Alg. Item HLD (RI.70) Bit X1. (This can only be done via the
PLC or SX Tool.) Its numeric output (NCM) can be modified in
the Hold Mode by a supervisory system or SX Tool.
4. As the numeric output cannot be read at the DX front panel, it is
recommended that this algorithm is used in the higher PM
numbers, reserving the lower PM numbers for algorithms which
can be displayed.
Tool or SX Tool.

system.
PMnNCM The calculation result of a numeric module.
PMnNMH A 1 when the calculated output is equal to or greater
than the numeric module high limit.
PMnNML A 1 when the calculated output is less than or equal to
the numeric module low limit.

In@ Analog input connections to a programmable module.
Algorithm 12 - The Minimum Select algorithm selects the minimum value of up to

Minimum Select eight input variables.
Each input may be weighted with a constant K. If an input is not
connected the corresponding variable is automatically excluded from
the calculation. If one of the inputs is required to be a constant, connect
an analog constant (ACO).
K0 + MIN. (I1*K1, I2*K2, ... , I8*K8)
Via the GX Tool

Click on PM in the toolbar, select Numeric, then Minimum and
source points and destination points In@ as applicable. Select the
calculation.
Via the SX Tool

This algorithm is assigned to a programmable function module when
the value 12 is configured in PM Item PMnTYP (RI.00).
addresses at Alg. Item In@, (RI.10 - RI.17).
Enter the values for constants at Alg. Item Kn, (RI.26-RI.34).
Via the GX Tool

Select the minimum module on screen and then Data to call up the
Data Window. Then enter the approrpiate values in the High Limit
and Low Limit fields.
Via the SX Tool

The low limit value is entered under Program Modules at Alg. Item
LOL (RI.37) and the high limit at Alg. Item HIL (RI.36).

2. The logical status of the algorithm can be seen under Program
Modules on the SX Tool at PM Item PMnST (RI.72) with
X1 = 1 NML Calculated Output is at Low Limit
X2 = 1 NMH Calculated Output is at High Limit
PM Item PMnHDC (RI.70) at Bit X1. (This can only be done via
the PLC or SX Tool.) Its numeric output (NCM) can be modified
in the Hold Mode by a supervisory system or SX Tool.
4. As the minimum select output cannot be read at the DX front
panel, it is recommended that this algorithm is used in the higher
PM numbers, reserving the lower PM numbers for algorithms
which can be displayed.

system.
Algorithm 13 - The Maximum Select algorithm selects the maximum values of up to

Maximum eight input variables.
Select Each input may be weighted with a constant K. If an input is not
connected the corresponding variable is automatically excluded from
the calculation. If one of the inputs is required to be a constant, connect
an analog constant (ACO).
K0 + MAX. (I1*K1, I2*K2, ... , I8*K8)

Via the GX Tool
Click on PM in the toolbar, select Numeric, then Maximum and
source points and destination points In@ as applicable. Select the
calculation.
Via the SX Tool

addresses at Alg. Item In@, (RI.10-RI.17).
Enter the values for the constants at Alg. Item Kn, (RI.26-RI.34).
Via the GX Tool

Select the maximum module on screen and then Data to call up the
Data Window. Then enter the appropriate values in the High Limit
and Low Limit fields.
Via the SX Tool

The module output can be limited by a low limit value entered at Alg.
Item LOL (RI.37) and a high limit at Alg. Item HIL (RI.36).
Program Modules at Alg. Item NCM (RI.60)
under Program Modules at PM Item PMnST (RI.72) with
X1 = 1 NML Calculated Output is at Low Limit.
X2 = 1 NMH Calculated Output is at High Limit.
PM Item PMnHDC (RI.70) Bit X1. (This can only be done via the

4. As the maximum select output cannot be read at the DX front
panel, it is recommended that this algorithm is used in the higher
PM numbers, reserving the lower PM numbers for algorithms
which can be displayed.
GX Tool or SX Tool.

system.
Algorithm 14 - Note: Only one Programmable Module within a DX controller

Psychrometric may be configured as Algorithm 14 or 15.
Calculation C This Psychrometric algorithm provides two calculation channels, each
with an output which is a function of two inputs, one representing
humidity, the other temperature.
Function Via the GX Tool

Click on PM in the toolbar, select Numeric, then Psychrometric and
Data to call up the Data Window. In the FUNCTION TYPE fields,
enter a value describing the type of each of the two channels as
follows:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enthalpy calculation
2 = Wet bulb calculation (Channel 1 only)
3 = Dew point calculation (Channel 1 only)

Via the SX Tool
the value 14 is configured in PM Item PMnTYP (RI.00). You must
first define the function of each channel of the algorithm. Select Alg.
Items FUN1 (RI.02) or FUN2 (RI.03) and define them as follows:
X2X1 = 00 Disabled
X2X1 = 01 Enthalpy calculation KJ/Kg
X2X1 = 10 Wet Bulb calculation (Channel 1 only)
X2X1 = 11 Dew Point calculation (Channel 1 only)
Humidity and Next, define the analog input variables:

Temperature
Via the GX Tool
Make connections between the source points and the destination points
TEMP1@, HUMID1@, TEMP2@ and HUMID2@ as applicable for:
Temperature Source Channel 1
Relative Humidity Source Channel 1
Via the SX Tool

TM1@ = Input variable connection for temperature value
(T) - Channel 1 (RI.10)
RH1@ = Input variable connection for relative humidity value
(F) - Channel 1 (RI.11)
(T) - Channel 2 (RI.12)
(F) - Channel 2 (RI.13)
Atmospheric Via the GX Tool

Pressure
Select the psychrometric module and then Data to call up the Data
Window. At the Atm. Press. #1 (mbar) and Atm. Press #2 (mbar)
fields, enter the atmospheric pressure (mbar) appropriate for your area.
Via the SX Tool

The atmospheric pressure (in mbar) can be specified for each channel
at Alg. Item ATP1 (RI.38) and ATP2 (RI.55).

Via the GX Tool
Window. Enter values in the High Limit and Low Limit fields.
Via the SX Tool

Item LOL (RI.37 and 54) and a high limit at Alg. Item HIL (RI.36 and
53).
Notes 1. On the SX Tool, the output of each channel can be seen under
Program Modules at Alg. Item NCM1 (RI.60) and NCM2
(RI.61).
2. The logic status of each channel can be seen on the SX Tool under
Program Modules at PM Item PMnST (RI.72), with following
bit structure:
X1 = 1 NML1 Calculated Output is at Low Limit - Channel 1
X2 = 1 NMH1 Calculated Output is at High Limit - Channel 1
GX Tool or SX Tool.
3. Channel 2 is only available on DX-9100 Version 1.1 or later, and
provides only an enthalpy calculation.
4. The module channels can be put in Hold Mode by entering the
value 1 in PM Item PMnHDC (RI.70), HLD1 at Bit X1 for
Channel 1, HLD2 at Bit X2 for Channel 2. (This can only be done
via the SX Tool.) Its numeric outputs (NCM1 and NCM2) can be
modified in the Hold Mode.
can be displayed.
6. Only one Programmable Module within a DX controller may be
configured as Algorithm 14 or 15.

PMnHLDm A 1 when the channel of the program module has been
overridden (in hold) from an SX service module or a
supervisory system.
PMnNCMm The calculation result of a channel of a numeric module.
PMnNMHm A 1 when the psychrometric numeric module output is
equal to or greater than the high limit of the channel.
PMnNMLm A 1 when the psychrometric numeric module output is
less than or equal to the low limit of the channel.

HUMIDn@ The relative humidity sensor connections for
psychrometric calculations.
TEMPn@ The temperature sensor connections for psychrometric
calculations.
Algorithm 15 - Note: Only one Programmable Module within a DX controller

Psychrometric may be configured as Algorithm 14 or 15.
Calculation F This Psychrometric algorithm provides two calculation channels, each
with an output which is a function of two inputs, one representing
humidity, the other temperature.
Function Via the GX Tool

Click on PM in the toolbar, select Numeric, then Psychrometric and
Data to call up the Data Window. In the FUNCTION TYPE fields,
enter a value describing the type of each of the two channels as
follows:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enthalpy calculation
2 = Wet bulb calculation (Channel 1 only)
3 = Dew point calculation (Channel 1 only)
Via the SX Tool

the value 15 is configured in PM Item PMnTYP (RI.00). You must
first define the function of each channel of the algorithm. Select Alg.
Items FUN1 (RI.02) or FUN2 (RI.03) and define them as follows:
X2X1 = 00 Disabled
X2X1 = 01 Enthalpy calculation Btu/lb
X2X1 = 10 Wet Bulb calculation F (Channel 1 only)
X2X1 = 11 Dew Point calculation F (Channel 1 only)
Humidity and Next, define the analog input variables:
Temperature
Via the GX Tool
Make connections between the source points and the destination points
TEMP1@, HUMID1@, TEMP2@ and HUMID2@ as applicable for:
Via the SX Tool

Channel 1 (RI.10)
Channel 1 (RI.11)
Channel 2 (RI.12)
Channel 2 (RI.13)
Atmospheric Via the GX Tool

Pressure
Window. At the Atm. Press. #1 (mbar) and Atm. Press #2 (mbar)
fields, enter the atmospheric pressure (mbar) appropriate for your area.
Via the SX Tool

The atmospheric pressure (in mbar) can be specified for each channel
at Alg. Item ATP1 (RI.38) and ATP2 (RI.55).
Note: Standard Sea Level barometric pressure is 1000 mbar or 29.92

in. HG. To convert barometric pressure from inches of mercury
(in. HG) to mbar, use this formula:
Pressure (mbar) = 33.42 x Pressure (in. Hg)

Via the GX Tool

Window. Enter values in the High Limit and Low Limit fields.
Via the SX Tool

Item LOL (RI.37 and 54) and a high limit at Alg. Item HIL
(RI.36 and 53).
Notes 1. On the SX Tool, the output of each channel can be seen under
Program Modules at Alg. Item NCM1 (RI.60) and NCM2
(RI.61).
2. The logic status of each channel can be seen on the SX Tool under
Program Modules at PM Item PMnST (RI.72), with following
bit structure:
Tool or SX Tool.
3. Channel 2 is only available on DX-9100 Version 1.1 or later, and
provides only an enthalpy calculation.
4. The module channels can be put in Hold Mode by entering the
value 1 in PM Item PMnHDC (RI.70), HLD1 at Bit X1 for
Channel 1, HLD2 at Bit X2 for Channel 2. (This can only be done
via the PLC or SX Tool.) Its numeric output (NCM) can be
modified in the Hold Mode by a supervisory system or SX Tool.
can be displayed.
6. Only one Programmable Module within a DX controller may be
configured as Algorithm 14 or 15.

supervisory system.
PMnNMHm A 1 when the psychrometric numeric module output is
equal to or greater than the high limit of the channel.
PMnNMLm A 1 when the psychrometric numeric module output is
less than or equal to the low limit of the channel.

HUMIDn@ The relative humidity sensor connections for
psychrometric calculations.
TEMPn@ The temperature sensor connections for psychrometric
calculations.
Algorithm 16 - The Line Segment Algorithm output is a nonlinear function of the input
Line Segment variable I1 defined on an X,Y plane using up to 17 break points. This is
typically used to linearize an input from a nonlinear sensor, or for a
complex reset schedule.
Output Signal
Y2
Y0, 1
Y3
Input
Y4 Signal
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 dxcglsf
Figure 15: Line Segment Function
Via the GX Tool

Click on PM in the toolbar, select Numeric, then Segment and
Data to call up the Data Window. On pages 1 and 2, enter the X and Y
coordinates as required. Make connections between the source point
and destination point In@ of the line segment module.

Via the SX Tool
I1@ = Input Variable Connection (RI.10)
Break point 0: coordinates X0,Y0 ...
Break point 16: coordinates X16,Y16
X0 = RI.26, X1 = RI.28 ... X16 = RI.58 (evens)
Y0 = RI.27, Y1 = RI.29 ... Y16 = RI.59 (odds)
2. Coordinates must be defined for the complete range of the input
variable (x) so that the output can always be calculated. X values
must be entered in ascending order and the same number may not
be entered twice.
3. A line segment module may be chained to the next programmable
function module (in numerical sequence) by:
GX Tool: Select the line segment module and then Data to call up
the Data Window. Go to page 2. At the Chain (0=N) field, enter
1 if you need more than seventeen break points. Define the next
PM as a SEGMENT module where breakpoints X0, Y0 ... X16,
Y16 will act as break points X17, Y17 ... X33, Y33 for the
Analog Input in the first defined module. No analog input
connection is required in the second module.
SX Tool: Set bit X16 in the PM Item PMnOPT (RI.01) to 1. In
this case, the next programmable function module must be defined
as a line segment module where break point 0-16 will act as break
points 17-33 for the input connected at I1@ in the first module.
No connection at I1@ is required in the second module.
4. The module can be put in Hold Mode by entering the value 1 at
can be displayed.

system.

Algorithm 17 - The Input Selector algorithm selects one of its four analog input
Input Selector connections as its output. The selection is determined by the state of
the digital inputs 5 and 6.
Table 1: Algorithm 17 - Input Selector

Input I5 I6 Output
I1 Off Off I1 x K1 + C1
I2 On Off I2 x K2 + C2
I3 Off On I3 x K3 + C3
I4 On On I4 x K4 + C4
If an analog input In@ is not connected and is selected by the status of

logical inputs I5 and I6, the output is not updated and maintains the
previously selected output value. It is recommended that each input
which can be selected is connected to a numeric Item with a known
value. The same numeric Item can be connected to more than one
input.
If a logic input is not connected, a value of 0 (OFF) is assumed.
Via the GX Tool

Click on PM in the toolbar, select Numeric, then Select and position
call up the Data Window. Enter the appropriate Kn and Cn values to
achieve the desired results. Make connections between source points
and destination points In@ in the selector module, as applicable.
Via the SX Tool

In@ = Analog Input Variable Connection n = 1-4 (RI.10 to RI.13)
In@ = Logic Input Variable Connection n = 5-6 (RI.14 to RI.15)
Cn, Kn = constants n = 1-4 (RI.26 to RI.33)
Kn (even RI)
Cn (odd RI)

Via the GX Tool

Click on the select module and then Data to call up the Data Window.
At the High Limit and Low Limit fields, set the required limits:
Via the SX Tool

X1 = 1 NML Calculated Output at Low Limit
X2 = 1 NMH Calculated Output at High Limit
GX Tool or SX Tool.
PM Item PMnHDC, (RI.70) at Bit X1. (This can only be done via
the PLC or SX Tool.) Its numeric output (NCM) can be modified
in the Hold Mode by a supervisory system or SX Tool.
can be displayed.

system.
In@ Input connections to a programmable module.

Algorithm 18 - The Calculator function is an algebraic expression of up to eight input
Calculator variables. When an input is not connected a value of 1 is assumed
and the corresponding constant (Kn) must be set to the required value.
If the denominator is 0 the equation outputs the last reliable
calculation.
The equation choices are listed below:
Equation 1 (linear):
(( K1 x I1 + K 2 x I 2 + K 3) x I 3 + K 4) x I 4
K0+
(( K 5 x I 5 + K 6 x I 6 + K 7) x I 7 + K 8) x I 8
Equation 2 (polynomial):
K1 x I13 + K 2 x I 2 2 + K 3 x I 3 x ( K 4 x I 4 K 5 x I 5) + K 6 x 16 + K 9
K0+
K 7 x I 7 + K8 x I8
(Equation 2 as seen in GX:)

K1 x I13 + K 2 x I 2 2 + K 3 x I 3 x ( K 4 x I 4 K 5 x I 5) + K 6 x I 6 0.5 + K 9
K0 +
K 7 x I 7 + K8 x I8
Via the GX Tool

Click on PM in the toolbar, select Numeric, then Calculator and
Data to call up the Data Window. At the Eq. (1 or 2) field, enter the
appropriate equation needed.
Enter values for the constants for the desired calculated output. Be
especially careful of the order and combinations of inputs and
constants.
Make connections between source points and In@ inputs of the
Calculator Module, as required.
Via the SX Tool

This algorithm assigned to a programmable function module when the
value 18 is configured in PM Item PMnTYP (RI.00).
The bit structure of the Alg. Item FUN (RI.02) defines the function of
the algorithm:
X2X1 = 00 Not used
X2X1 = 01 Equation 1
X2X1 = 10 Equation 2
In = Input Variable n = 1 to 8 (RI.10 to RI.17)
Kn = Constant n = 0 to 8/9 (RI.26 to RI.35)

Via the GX Tool

Select the calculator module and then Data to call up the Data
Window. Then make entries in the High Limit and Low Limit
fields.
If the calculation > high limit, then output = high limit
If the calculation < low limit, then output = low limit
Via the SX Tool

X1 = 1 NML Calculated Output is at Low Limit.
X2 = 1 NMH Calculated Output is at High Limit.
GX Tool or SX Tool.
can be displayed.

system.

Algorithm 19 - The Timer Algorithm provides an eight-channel time delay unit. Each
Timer Functions channel has two inputs and provides one logic output which can be
connected to an output module or used in the PLC module. Each
channel provides a numerical output which displays the amount of time
remaining until the end of the delay time defined.
Pulse Type
The output goes high for a time
period T after an input transition INPUT
from low to high. Further RESET
transitions during the timing cycle OUTPUT

T T
will not influence the cycle. A 1

on the reset input forces the output
to 0, clearing the time cycle. At
the end of the time period, the
output will go off whether the
input is high or low.
Retriggerable Pulse
Similar to above, with the
exception that the timing period INPUT
begins from the last input RESET
transition. A 1 on the reset input OUTPUT

T
forces the output to 0, clearing

the time cycle.
On Delay with Memory

The output goes high after a time
period (T) from the input going INPUT
high. If the input is high for a RESET
period less than (T), the output OUTPUT

T T
will never go high. The output

goes low only after the reset goes
high. A 1 on the reset input
forces the output to 0, clearing
the time cycle.

On Delay
The output goes high after a time
period (T) from the input going INPUT
high. If the input is high for a RESET

T T T
period less than (T), the output OUTPUT
will never go high. The output

goes low immediately when the
input goes low. A 1 on the reset
input forces the output to 0,
clearing the time cycle.
Off Delay
The output goes high immediately
when the input goes high. The INPUT
output goes low after a time period RESET
(T) from the input going low. If OUTPUT

T
the input goes high during the

period less than (T), the output
will not go low. A 1 on the reset
input forces the output to 0,
clearing the time cycle.
Via the GX Tool

Click on PM in the toolbar, select Numeric, then Timer and position
call up the Data Window. At the Timer #n type field, enter the
number for the desired timer output action:
0 = Disabled
1 = Pulse
2 = Retriggerable Pulse
3 = ON delay with memory
4 = ON delay
5 = OFF delay
At the Time Units #n field, enter a value to determine the time scale:
0 = seconds
1 = minutes
2 = hours
At the Time Period field, enter the delay time as a whole number (no
decimal) in the units chosen under the Time Units #n field. The
module will round up or down any decimal value to the nearest whole
number.
Make connections between source points and destination points In@
(for input connection) and RSn@ (for reset connection).
Whenever a source point entered at Reset Connection #n goes ON,
the output immediately goes OFF and the timer is reset. A reset
connection is always required for Timer Type 3.
Via the SX Tool

A Timer Algorithm is assigned to a programmable function module
when the value 19 is configured in PM Item PMnTYP (RI.00). The bit
structure of the Alg. Item FUNn (n = 1-8) (RI.02 to RI.09) defines the
function of each channel of the algorithm:
X3X2X1 = 000 Channel Disabled
X3X2X1 = 001 Pulse
X3X2X1 = 010 Retriggerable Pulse
X3X2X1 = 011 ON Delay with Memory
X3X2X1 = 100 ON Delay
X3X2X1 = 101 OFF Delay
X6X5 = 00 Time in seconds
X6X5 = 01 Time in minutes
X6X5 = 10 Time in hours
In@ = Input Variable Connection for Channel #n n = 1-8
(even numbers, RI.10 to RI.24)
RSn@ = Reset Variable Connection for Channel #n n = 1-8
(odd numbers, RI.11 to RI.25)
Tn = Time period Channel #n (0 - 3276) n = 1-8
(RI.26 to RI.33)
TIMn = Time to end of period Channel #n n = 1-8
(RI.60 to RI.67)
Notes 1. Each channel can be put in Hold Mode using the SX Tool by
entering the value 1 at PM Item PMnHDC (n = 1-8), (RI.70);
HLD1 = Bit X1...HLD8 = Bit X8. Its logic output can be modified
in the Hold Mode.
2. The logical output status of the algorithm can be seen on the SX
Tool at PM Item PMnDO (RI.71); TDO1 = Bit X1...TDO8 = Bit
X8.
3. A 1 on the reset input always forces the output to 0, clearing
the time cycle.
4. Do not modify the time base (seconds, minutes, hours) while the
timer is active. Modifying the time period once it has started has
no effect until the timer is re-triggered based on type and input.
The SX is a good tool to use to see how much time remains on a
timer at Item TIMn.

5. As the timer functions cannot be read at the DX front panel, it is
can be displayed.

supervisory system.
PMnTDOm A 1 when the numeric timer channel output is ON.
PMnTIMm The numeric timer module timer value of each channel.
It will be 0 when the channel is not triggered or the
timer has expired; or it will be the number of seconds
(or minutes, or hours) left as the timer decrements.

RSn@ The connection to the reset function of a timer module
channel (to reset the output).
Algorithm 20 - The Totalization module provides an eight-channel totalization

Totalization algorithm. Each channel can be configured for Event, Integrator, or
Time totalization. In Firmware Version 1.1 or later, an Accumulated
Total option is available.
Event Counter The Event Counter performs the counting of binary transitions from 0
to 1 of a logic source connected to the input of the channel. The
number of transitions is scaled to generate a numeric output of total
transitions. The output is incremented whenever the number of the
transitions counted is equal to the value set in the scaling factor field.
The input connection to an Event Counter must be a logic type.
Integrator The Integrator performs the integration of the value of an analog

variable connected to the input of the channel. The integration rate is
determined by the time constant (FTC) (in minutes) and the result read
as a numeric output. In other words, the Integrator will count up to the
value of the numerical input in a period of time equal to the time
constant (assuming that the input remains constant during this period).
For example, if the input is equal to 30 and the time constant is five
minutes, the output will count up to 30 in five minutes (at a rate of 0.1
per second), to 60 in ten minutes, and so on, until it reaches the full
scale limit.
To integrate kW into kWh, set the time constant to 60 minutes (one
hour).

If the input is in gallons per minute, a time constant of one minute
would give a total in gallons. If the actual rate was, for example, 100
gallons per minute, in one hour 6,000 gallons would be totalized, and
in one day 144,000 gallons. Since the totalized output only displays to
9999, the time constant could be used to slow down the totalization.
By setting the time constant to 1000, the totalization units would be
gallons x 1000.
If the input is in liters per second, a time constant of 1/60 (=0.0167) is
required to totalize in liters, as one second equals 1/60 minutes. As
explained above, this may result in very high numbers very quickly, so
it could be slowed down by setting the time constant to 1000 x 0.0167
(=16.67) and totalizing in liters x 1000 (=cubic meters).
As the totalization module has a floating point output, resolution is lost
beyond a value of 2,047. (Refer to the Configuration Tool - Entering
Values section earlier in this document.) Therefore it is necessary to
totalize integrated values by using either a cascade of one integrator
and one or more event counters, each with a full scale limit of 1,000
and using the full scale limit flag (FSL) to reset the counters in
sequence, or by using the Accumulated Total option. When this
option is selected, the Accumulated Total for the channel will be
incremented whenever the output reaches its full scale limit, and the
output will automatically be reset. The Accumulated Total records
the number of times the Full Scale has been reached.
The input connection to an integrator must be analog only.
Time Counter The Time Counter function counts the time that the source point is in a
1 condition at a rate entered in the time constant (in seconds). The
output is the totalized time value. Typically the time constant would be
set at 60 seconds for runtime in minutes or 3600 seconds for runtime in
hours. The Accumulated Total option may also be used for a Time
Counter if a total of greater than 2047 is required.
Via the GX Tool

Click on PM in the toolbar, select Totalization and position the
module (box) on the screen. Select the module and then Data to call up
the Data Window. In the TOTALIZATION n TYPE field enter a
value to assign the required function for each channel.
0 = Disabled
1 = Event Counter
2 = Integrator
3 = Time Counter
Make connections between source and destination points In@ (for
input connection) and RSn@ (for reset connection).

Via SX Tool
the value 20 is configured in PM Item PMnTYP (RI.00). The bit
structure of the Alg. Item FUNn (n = 1-8), (RI.02 to RI.09) defines the
X2X1 = 00 Not used
X2X1 = 01 Event Counter of a digital input
X2X1 = 10 Integrator of an analog input
X2X1 = 11 Time Counter of a digital input
In@ = Input Variable Connection for Channel #n n = 1-8
RSn@ = Reset Variable Connection for Channel #n n = 1-8
Full Scale Limit Via GX Tool
At the Full Scale Limit #n field, enter the required value. When the
output reaches this value, the output will hold there until reset, or, if the
Accumulated Total option is selected, the output will automatically
be reset to 0 and the accumulated total for this channel will be
incremented.
Via SX Tool
The Full Scale Limits are entered at Alg. Items FSLn (RI.26 to RI.33),
where n is equal to the channel number (1-8).
Scale/Time Via GX Tool

Constant
At the Scale/Time Const #n field, enter the required value. For the
Integrator, the value is in minutes. For Event, it is the number of
ON/OFF transitions to count as one event. For Runtime, the value is in
seconds, and 60 would be runtime in minutes, 3600 would be runtime
in hours.
Note: Changing values after counts are already there, will alter the
totals accordingly. For example, if the Event scale was at 1 with
20 counts, and the Event scale was changed to 2, the counts
would equal 10.
Via SX Tool
The Scaling Factors/Time Constants are entered at Alg. Items FTCn
(RI.34 to RI.41), where n is equal to the channel number (1-8).

Increment Via GX Tool
Accumulated
At the Incrmnt ACC. #n (0=N) field, enter 1 or 0. (DX-9100
Total Function
Version 1.1 or later.) This is the Increment Accumulated Total
function. It is recommended that the Full Scale Limit should be set to
1,000, 100, or 10. Setting Increment ACC to 1 will enable the
counter to count the number of times that the full scale limit is reached.
The Accumulated Total is a 4-byte integer and can store up to
9,999,999 counts (32,767 when the Metasys option has been selected,
under GLOBAL, Counter Type field).
Via SX Tool
The the Increment Accumulated Total function is defined by setting
Bit X8 in Alg. Item FUNn (n=1-8) (RI.02 to RI.09) as follows:
X8 = 1 Increment ACTn and reset TOTn when FSSn = 1 (n=1-8)
(Version 1.1 or later)
Notes When Bit X8 is set to 0 (default) and the output reaches the Full Scale
Limit FSLn, the algorithm function is frozen until reset. When Bit X8
is set to 1 and the output reaches the Full Scale Limit FSLn, the
totalized output is automatically reset to 0 and the Alg. Item ACTn
(RI.73 to RI.80) is incremented by one count.
1. You can read and modify the totalized values from the DX front
panel. See Display Panel and Keypads in the DX-9100 Extended
Digital Controller Technical Bulletin.
2. On the SX Tool the output of each channel can be seen at Alg.
Item TOTn (RI.60 to RI.67), and the Accumulated Total can be
seen at Alg. Item ACTn (RI.73 to RI.80).
3. On the SX Tool, each channel can be put in Hold Mode by
entering the value 1 at PM Item PMnHDC (n = 1-8) (RI.70);
HLD1 is Bit X1, HLD8 is Bit X8. Its numeric (TOTn) output can
be modified in the Hold Mode by a supervisory system.
4. The Full Scale Status of Channel #n can be seen at PM Item
PMnST (n = 1-8) (RI.72); FSS1 is Bit X1...FSS8 is Bit X8. These
logic variables can be used to signal an alarm or initiate a dial-up
to notify an operator that a limit has been reached.
5. A 1 on the Reset input forces the totalized output and the
accumulated total to 0.

PMnFSSm A 1 when the output of a channel of a totalization
module is at its full scale limit.
supervisory system.
PMnTOTm The totalized value of a totalization module channel; the
number of events, runtime, or integration value.

RSn@ The connection to the reset function of a totalization module
channel (to reset to 0 and re-start).
Algorithm 21 - A Comparator Algorithm provides an eight-channel comparator

Comparator algorithm. Each channel can be configured to perform the comparison
of an analog input variable with a setpoint. A high limit, low limit,
equality or dynamic logic status is generated.
Comparator functions:
High Limit: Logic Status LSn = 1 when In >= SPn
LSn = 0 when In <= SPn - DFn
LS=1
Setpoint (SP)
DF
LS=0
Figure 16: Comparator High Limit Function Example
Low Limit: Logic Status

LSn = 1 when In <= SPn
LSn = 0 when In >= SPn + DFn
LS=0
LS=1 DF
Setpoint (SP)
Figure 17: Comparator Low Limit Function Example
Equality Status: Logic Status

LSn = 1 when SPn - DFn < In < SPn + DFn
LSn = 0 when In < SPn - DFn or
In > SPn + DFn

LS=0
LS=1 LS=1 DF
Setpoint (SP)
DF
LS=0
Figure 18: Comparator Equality Status Function Example
Dynamic Status: Logic Status

LSn = 1 when In is changing more than the value of the
differential (DFn) in one second.
LSn = 0 when In is changing less than the value of the
differential (DFn) in one second.
Via the GX Tool

Click on PM in the toolbar, select Numeric, then Comparator and
Data to call up the Data Window. At the CHANNEL TYPE #n
field, enter the value corresponding to the desired function:
0 = Channel Disabled
1 = High Limit
2 = Low Limit
3 = Equality Status
4 = Dynamic Status
Then enter the Setpoint and Differential values for each channel.
At the Differential #n field, enter a fixed value. The Setpoint #n
may be a fixed value or can be sourced from a numerical Item. Make
connections between the source points and destination points In@ and
SPn@, as applicable.
Via the SX Tool

structure of the Alg. Item FUNn (n = 1-8) (RI.02 to RI.09) defines the
X3X2X1 = 000 Channel Disabled
X3X2X1 = 001 High Limit
X3X2X1 = 010 Low Limit
X3X2X1 = 011 Equality Status
X3X2X1 = 100 Dynamic Status
In@ = Analog Input Variable Connection for Channel #n n = 1-8

SPn@ =Setpoint value Variable Connection for Channel #n n = 1-8
NCMn = Deviation (In - SPn) - Channel #n n = 1-8
(RI.60 to RI.67)
SPn = Setpoint value (If SPn@ not connected) Channel #n n = 1-8
DFn = Differential Channel #n n = 1-8
Notes 1. If there is no connection to Item SPn@ the module uses the
setpoint value in Item SPn (even numbers, RI.26 to RI.40).
2. On the SX Tool, each channel can be put in Hold Mode by entering
the value 1 at PM Item PMnHDC (RI.70); HLD1 = Bit X1...HLD8
= Bit X8. Its numeric output (NCMn) can be modified in the Hold
Mode by a supervisory system.
3. The Logic Status of Channel #n can be seen at PM Item PMnST.
(RI.72); LS1 = Bit X1...LS8 = Bit X8.
can be displayed.

supervisory system.
PMnLSm A 1 when the comparator module channel is at its
comparison true logic state.

SPn@ A setpoint connection for a comparator channel if a remote
setpoint is desired, otherwise the entered value for the
setpoint will be used.
Algorithm 22 - A Sequencer Algorithm provides the control of 1-8 logic outputs as a

Sequencer function of the value of an analog source variable or two logic source
variables (increase and decrease signals) and the state of eight logic
(disable) inputs.
A sequencer module may be chained to the next module in numerical
sequence to provide control of 16 logic outputs in one sequencer
algorithm. Each logic output represents one stage of the controlled
load.

The logic outputs or stages can be grouped into sets, each set having a
definable number of stages.
The sequencer module is used to control multi-stage equipment,
maintaining minimum ON/OFF times, interstage delays and
sequencing loads.
The sequencer can be interfaced to the PLC module and to other
programmable function modules which provide control, interlocking,
and alarm capability.
Via the GX Tool

Click on PM in the toolbar and select Sequencer.
For a Binary Code sequencer (see Configuring the Options, below),
Click on PM in the toolbar and select Binary Sequencer.
Via the SX Tool

value 22 is configured in PM Item PMnTYP (RI.00).
Configuring the Step Mode

Options
The output stages are controlled in sequence according to the last on,
first off principle. For example, a three-stage sequencer controls the
output stages in the following sequence: (0 = OFF, 1 = ON)
Stage
1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
2 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
3 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
As load % increases As load % decreases
Sequential Mode
The sets are controlled in sequence according to the first on, first off
principle. Stages within a set are controlled to the last on, first off
principle (like Step Mode). For example, a three-set sequencer controls
the output sets in the following sequence: (0 = OFF, 1 = ON)
Set
1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
2 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
3 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

Equal Runtime
The ON time of the first output stage of each set is totalized. In case of
an increase of load requiring the activation of a new set, the set with
the lowest ON time will be switched on. In case of a decrease of load
requiring the switching off of a stage in a set at full load, the set with
the highest ON time will be switched off first. Stages within a set are
controlled to the last on, first off principle (Step Mode). For example,
a three-set sequencer controls the output sets in the following sequence:
Set Runtime Runtime
1 90 0 0 0 1 95 1 1 1 0
2 40 0 1 1 1 110 1 0 0 0
3 65 0 0 1 1 99 1 1 0 0
As the load increases, the set with a runtime of 40 hours starts first. As
the load decreases, the set with a runtime of 110 hours stops first.
Binary Code
The output stages must form one set and are controlled in sequence
according to a binary code principle. For example, a three-stage
sequencer controls the output stages in the following sequence:
Stage 1kW 2 kW 3 kW 4kW 5kW 6kW 7kW

1 (1kW) 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
2 (2kW) 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
3 (4kW) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
As load % increases -------------->
Note: The Binary Code Mode is intended for use only with electric
heaters or other nonmechanical devices.
The binary code sequencer will always select the appropriate
stage combination for the requested output, with a stage delay
between the changing of a stage combination. The sequencer
will not step through successive combinations when a large
change in requested output occurs.
When the Binary Code Mode is selected, the algorithm will
automatically assign load factors which will summate to 100%,
and the differential will be set to 20% of the minimum (first
stage) load factor with a maximum of 3% of the total load.

Via the GX Tool
Select the sequencer module and then Data to call up the Data
Window. At the Sequen. Module Mode field, enter the value that
defines the desired mode:
0 = Disable
1 = Step Mode
2 = Sequential
3 = Not Applicable (Use Binary Sequence for Binary Code)
4 = Equal Runtime
(For the binary sequence module, the Sequence Module Mode is
automatically set to binary code.)
Via the SX Tool

The Algorithm Mode is defined by bits X3 X2 X1 of PM Item
PMnOPT (RI.01), as follows:
X3 X2 X1 = 000 Disabled
X3 X2 X1 = 001 Step Mode
X3 X2 X1 = 010 Sequential
X3 X2 X1 = 011 Binary Code
X3 X2 X1 = 100 Equal Runtime
Analog Input The analog control input determines the required output in percent of
Connection the total output, and would normally be the output of a PID module.
The percent load factor for each output stage and the differential must
be specified (see Configuring the Load Factors and Differential in this
section), except for a Binary Code sequence, where the load factors are
calculated automatically by the module.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the analog source point and the INC@
destination point, which also represents the analog input connection, in
the sequencer module.
Via the SX Tool

Set Bit X8 of PM Item PMnOPT (RI.01) to 0 to define the input as
analog. Connect the analog source point at Alg. Item INC@ (RI.18).

Digital Input One digital control input increases the required output value and a
Connection second input decreases the output value. When digital inputs are
connected, a Full Load Ramp Time [sec.] determines the time that the
Increase Input must be ON for the requested output to change from 0 to
100% or the Decrease Input must be ON for the requested output to
change from 100 to 0%.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the digital source point and the INC@
destination point. Also make a connection from the Decrease digital
source point to the DEC@ destination point.
Select the sequencer or binary sequencer module and then Data to call
up the Data Window. Go to page 2. At the Full Load Rmp (sec) field,
enter the value corresponding to the desired Full Load Ramp Time
action.
Via the SX Tool

Assign the input type by setting Bit X8 of PM Item PMnOPT (RI.01)
to 1 to define the input as digital. Enter the increase source point at
Alg. Item INC@ (RI.18). Enter the decrease source point at Alg. Item
DEC@ (RI.19). Set the Full Load Ramp Time at Alg. Item FLR
(RI.44).
Sequencer The sequencer control is either pro-active or retroactive.

Control
Pro-active
The first stage selected by the sequencer is always ON unless the Fast
Step Down input is active. The second stage is switched ON when the
first stage is at its load factor, the third stage when the second stage is
at its load factor, and so on. This mode is normally required for
equipment with its own modulating control, for example, centrifugal
refrigeration compressors.
Switched
load
3
Each load = 20%
2
0 20 40 60
Requested load %
Figure 19: Pro-active Sequencer Control

Retroactive
The first stage not switched ON until the required load is equal to its
load factor. Each subsequent stage is not switched until its load factor
is required. This mode is normally required for equipment without
modulating control, for the control of electric heaters, for example.
Switched
load
3
Each load = 20%
2
0 20 40 60
Requested load %
Figure 20: Retroactive Sequencer Control
Via the GX Tool

Window. Go to page 2. At the Retroactive (0=N) field, enter 0 for
Pro-active, or 1 for Retroactive. (A binary sequencer module is
automatically set to Retroactive.)
Via the SX Tool

Bit X9 of PM Item PMnOPT defines the Sequencer Control Mode as
follows:
X9 = 0 Pro-active Control
X9 = 1 Retroactive Control
Configuring the This setting configures the number of stages in each set. When the first
Sets and Stages set contains (for example) three stages, NST1 (Stg 1 first of ) is defined
as 3, and NST2 (Stg 2 first of ) and NST3 (Stg 3 first of ) are defined
as 0. A second set is then defined by NST4 (Stg 4 first of) with the
required stages for that set, and the following Alg. Items NSTn in
numerical sequence are defined as 0, and so on, until all required
stages are defined. A binary code sequence will only operate on the
first set as defined by NST1.

In Version 1.1 or later, an option is available to reverse the action of all
stages within sets, except the first stages. When this option is enabled,
all stages within a set are switched on when the first stage of a set is
switched on, and then the second and subsequent stages are switched
off as the load increases. As the load decreases, stages are switched on
again. A set cannot be switched off until all its stages are on. This
option is applicable to chiller compressor control where the stages are
connected to unloader solenoids.
Via the GX Tool

Window. At the Stg #n first of field, enter a value to determine the
number of stages in the set. If there are no sets, enter 1 at each Stg
#n first of field for the number of individual stages needed. At the
Invert Stgs in set field on page 2, enter 1 to reverse the action of
stages in sets.
For a binary sequencer module, select the binary sequencer module,
and then Data to call up the Data Window. At the Number of Stages
field, enter the number of outputs to be controlled as one binary coded
set.
Via the SX Tool

Enter the appropriate values at Alg. Item NSTn (n = 1-8) (RI.02 to
RI.09).
The reverse stages in sets option is defined in Bit X6 of PM Item
PMnOPT as follows:
X6 = 0 Direct Stages in Sets All stages are switched ON for
increasing load.
X6 = 1 Invert Stages in Sets Stages within a set are switched
ON when the set is ON and
switched OFF for increasing
load.
Configuring the This setting configures the disable condition connections for the
Disable sequencer. When a stage is disabled by its connection being equal to 1,
Conditions the sequencer will immediately switch off the stage and automatically
select the next available stage according to the Sequencer Mode
defined. When any stage of a set is disabled, the complete set is
considered as disabled and all stages are immediately switched off, and
the sequencer will automatically select the next available set.
Therefore, only the first stage needs to be disabled in order to disable
all stages within a set. A disabled condition in a Binary Code sequencer
will disable the sequencer operation. If a stage (or set) is disabled, the
sequencer will use the load factors assigned to the enabled stages to run
the sequencer.

Via the GX Tool
Make connections between the logic source points and the DISn@
disable points in the sequencer module. In the binary sequencer module
make a connection between the logic source point and the DIS@
disable point.
Via the SX Tool

To disable an output stage, enter the address of a logic variable at Alg.
Item DISn@ (n = 1-8) (RI.10 to RI.17).
Configuring the The load factor of each stage is entered as a percentage of the
Load Factors and maximum load required from all stages controlled by the sequencer
Differential module. The sum of the load factors of the stages may be greater than
100% if the controlled plant has standby capacity. For example, if a
plant comprises five units where the maximum required load is
provided by four units, and one unit acts as a standby, the load factor of
each unit (stage) is set at 25%. If the units are not of equal capacity the
appropriate load factors (as a percentage of the maximum required
load) may be entered and the algorithm will always switch the
appropriate number of units available ( i.e. those which are not disabled
and have not exceeded their maximum switching cycles limit) to meet
the required load.
The load differential must normally be less than the minimum load
factor entered for any stage. If the load differential is greater than the
load factor of the first stage in a set, that set may not switch off at 0%
load in Retroactive Control Mode, and more than one stage may remain
on at 0% load in Pro-active Control Mode. This can be avoided in Step
Mode by setting the load factor of the first stage at a higher value than
the load differential, because in Step Mode the first stage is always the
last to be switched off in the sequence. (In other modes any stage or set
could be the last to be switched off because the algorithm changes the
order of operation.)
When the binary code option is selected, the algorithm will
automatically assign load factors, which will summate to 100%, and
the differential will be set to 20% of the minimum (first stage) load
factor with a maximum of 3% of the total load.
Via the GX Tool

Window. Go to page 2. At the Ld Fctr Stg #n (%) field, enter the
percent for each stage that has been defined.
At the Load Diffrntial (%) field, enter a value to determine the
differential between successive on and off operations.

Via the SX Tool
The output load factor is defined by Alg. Item OLFn (n = 1-8) (RI.26
to RI.33). The differential between successive on and off operations is
set in Alg. Item LDF (RI.45).
Configuring the A series of delay times have to be defined to control the sequencing
Timers steps. A set or stage cannot be switched until the delay time of the
previous set or stage has expired.
Note: The sequencer module will only switch one set or stage during
each program cycle which occurs every one second. Therefore,
the minimum effective time delay between sets or stages is one
second. Time values of less than one second will result in a
delay time of one second.
Via the GX Tool

Window. Go to page 2. Set the following values (in seconds):
First set on delay: Delay between the first and second stages of the first
set, or delay between the first and second set if the
first set has only one stage.
Stage on delay: Delay between stages, and delay between the last
stage of one set and the first stage of the next set.
Set on delay: Delay between stage one and stage two of a set other
than the first set, or delay between sets other than
the first set if the sets have only one stage.
Stage off delay: Off delay between stages.
Set off delay: Off delay between the last stage to be switched off
of one set and the first stage to be switched off of
the next set, or off delay between sets if the sets only
have one stage.
At the Minimum On Time (sec) field, enter a value in seconds.
It defines the time in seconds that a stage must be ON before it may be
switched OFF.
At the Minimum Off Time (sec) field, enter a value in seconds. It
defines the time in seconds that a stage must be OFF before it may be
switched ON.
If the Minimum On Time and Minimum Off Time are only applied
to the first stages in each set, then at the Min ON/OFF for set field,
enter a 1.
For a BIN SEQ, select DATA and set Interstage Delay (in seconds).

Via the SX Tool
Define the sequencing timing control as follows:
T1First Set ON Delay [sec.] (RI.34)
T2Stage ON Delay [sec.] (RI.35)
T3Set ON Delay [sec.] (RI.36)
T4Stage OFF Delay [sec.] (RI.37)
T5Set OFF Delay [sec.] (RI.38)
The Minimum ON Time for a stage or set is defined by Alg. Item TON
(RI.41). It defines the time in seconds that a stage must be ON before
it may be switched OFF.
The Minimum OFF Time for a stage or set is defined by Alg. Item
TOFF (RI.42). It defines the time in seconds that a stage must be OFF
before it may be switched ON.
If Bit X7 of PM Type PMnOPT (RI.01) is set to 1, the Items TON and
TOFF will only be applied to the first stage in a set and not to the other
stages in the same set (if any).
A Binary Code sequencer does not use the Minimum ON and OFF time
parameter.
Configuring The sequencer algorithm controls the starting of the first stage in each
Maximum set such that the number of starts in one hour does not exceed the
Switching Cycles defined maximum switching cycles value (MAXC). The algorithm
does this by calculating the minimum time between start commands
using the formula: 3600sec./MAXC. The first stage in a set is
effectively locked out and prevented from restarting within this period
of time. This time is typically longer than the Minimum OFF Time.
When operating in Step or Sequential Mode, the sequencer will wait
for a set to become available again after a previous start command. In
Equal Run-Time Mode, a set which is unavailable will be skipped and
the set with the next lowest run-time will be selected.
In a Binary Code sequencer, the MAXC parameter is not used.
Via the GX Tool

Window. At the Max Switch Cycl/hr field, enter a value for cycles
per hour. For example, if equal to 6, a stage will only be allowed one
start every ten minutes.
Via the SX Tool

The maximum number of switching cycles allowed for the first stage of
each set in one hour is defined by Alg. Item MAXC (RI.43).

Configuring Fast A digital input connection will initiate a Fast Step Down cycle of the
Step Down sequencer. The Fast Step Down cycle is controlled by a Fast Step
Down Stage Delay and a Fast Step Down Set Delay. The Fast Step
Down cycle does not respect the Minimum ON Time parameter. Once
the procedure is activated, it cannot be interrupted until the switching-
off sequence is completed and all stages are off. The Fast Step Down
connection is also used to switch off the final pro-active load in the
sequence when the plant is shut down.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the Fast Step Down logic source point and
the FST@ input in the sequencer or binary sequencer module. Select
the module and then Data to call up the Data Window. Enter values (in
seconds) for the following fields:
Fast Step Dwn (Stg): Off delay between stages.
Fast Step Dwn (Set): Off delay between the last stage to be switched
off of one set and the first stage to be switched
off of the next set, or off delay between sets if
the sets only have one stage.
Via the SX Tool

A digital input connected to Alg. Item FSD@ (RI.20) initiates the Fast
Step Down cycle of the sequencer. The Fast Step Down cycle is
controlled by the Fast Step Down Stage Delay T4F (RI.39) and the Fast
Step Down Set Delay T5F (RI.40).
Notes 1. You can view and override the sequencer output value and
totalized runtime (in hours) of each stage using the DX front panel.
See Display Panel and Keypads in the DX-9100 Extended Digital
Controller Technical Bulletin.
2. The output status of each stage can be seen on the SX Tool at PM
Item PMnDO (RI.71) Bits X1 to X8.
3. The requested load can be seen on the SX Tool at Alg. Item OUT
(RI.60).
4. The output difference of the algorithm can be seen on the SX Tool
at Alg. Item OUTD (RI. 61). It represents the required load minus
the sum of the loads of all stages which are ON. It can be used to
control a modulating device between the switching of stages to
provide continuous control over the complete range (sometimes
referred to as Vernier control).
5. The sum of the loads of all stages which are ON can be seen on the
SX Tool at Alg. Item OUTS (RI.62).
6. The runtime (in hours) of each stage can be seen on the SX Tool at
Alg. Item RTn (n = 1-8) (RI.73 to RI.80).

7. The sequencer module can be put in Hold Mode by entering the
value 1 in Alg. Item PMnHDC (RI.70, Bit X1). The requested
output Alg. Item OUT can be modified in the Hold Mode by a
supervisory system.
8. The output disabled status (1 for Disabled) of each stage can be
seen on the SX Tool at Alg. Item PMnST (RI.72, Bits X1 to X8).
9. The status of the maximum switching cycles per hour timer for
each stage can be seen at Alg. Item PMnST (RI.72, Bits X9 to
X16).
When a stage is switched on, the respective bit is set to 1 to
indicate that it cannot be switched on again until its timer expires
(if it is the first stage in a set).
10. A sequencer module may be chained to the next programmable
function module (in numerical sequence) by setting Bit X16 in the
PM Item PMnOPT (RI.01) to 1. (For GX: Select the sequencer
module and then Data to call up the Data Window. In the Chain
Next PM (0=N) field, enter 0 for No, 1 for Yes.) When a
sequencer module is chained, the next programmable function
module must be defined as a sequencer module where stages 1-8
will act as stages 9-16 and use the same data for Items INC@,
DEC@ and FSD@, T1 - T5, T4F and T5F, TON, TOF, MAXC,
FLR, and LDF in the first module. Only NSTn, OLFn and DISn@
are required in the second module and its outputs OUT, OUTD
and OUTS have no meaning. (In the GX Tool only: Stage# first
of , Output Load Fctr and Disable are required.)

system.
PMnMCSm A 1 as long as the maximum cycles status timer for an
output stage is active.
PMnOUT The analog value of the requested output load %
(percent) of a sequencer.
PMnOUTD The output difference between the required load minus
the sum of the loads of stages that are ON in an
Sequencer Mode. This can be used for Vernier control.
PMnSTOm A 1 when the staged output of a sequencer module is
requested to be ON.

DISn@ A connection in a sequencer to disable the corresponding
stage or set number.
FST@ The connection to set the sequencer module into Fast Step
Down Mode.
Configuration The following examples show a sequencer with eight stages,

Examples subdivided into one set of two stages and two sets of three stages.
Via the GX Tool

Stage 1 first of = 2 Stage 5 first of = 0
The sequencer is defined by connecting an analog source point to
INC@. Pro-active control is defined by entering 0 under the
Retroactive (0=N) field on page 2.
The output load factors are defined (in percentages) as follows:
Ld Fctr Stg 1 (%) = 10 Ld Fctr Stg 5 (%) = 10
The Load Differential is set to 2% via Load Diffrntial (%) = 2 field.
Via the SX Tool

Alg. Items NSTn (RI.02 to RI.09) must be defined as follows:
NST1 = 2 NST5 = 0
NST2 = 0 NST6 = 3
NST3 = 3 NST7 = 0
NST4 = 0 NST8 = 0
The sequencer is defined with an analog input connected to
INC@ (X8 = 0), and Stage 1 is ON at 0% load (pro-active control
X9=0).

The output load factors OFL 1 to 8 (RI.26 to RI.33) are defined as
follows:
OLF1 = 10 OLF5 = 10
OLF2 = 10 OLF6 = 20
OLF3 = 10 OLF7 = 20
OLF4 = 10 OLF8 = 10
The differential LDF (RI.45) is defined as 2%.
Figure 21: Sequencer Module Example 1, Step Mode

Figure 22: Sequencer Module Example 2, Sequential Mode

Algorithm 23 - Each channel of a 4-channel line segment has an output which is a
Four-Channel nonlinear function of its input variable defined on an X,Y plane using
Line Segment four break points. The function is linear between break points. The
(Version 1.1 or input break values must go in increasing order, although the output
Later) break values can increase or decrease. This is typically used for a
simple reset schedule.
Output n
Y2, Y3
Y0, Y1
Input n
X0 X1 X2 X3 n = 1-4
Figure 23: Example of a Line Segment Function
Via the GX Tool

Click on PM in the toolbar, select Numeric, then Four-Segment and
the numeric source points and In@ inputs, as applicable.
Select the module and then Data to call up the Data Window. Under
CH #n, in the X column, enter input (X) break values at the 0, 1, 2,
and 3 fields. In the Y column, in each field, enter the output (Y)
break value which corresponds to the input entry. Define the values of
X for the complete range of the input.
Via the SX Tool

For Channel n (n = 1-4):
In@ = Input Variable Connection (RI.10 to RI.13)
Break Point 0 defined by coordinates X0-n,Y0-n
(X0-n; RI.26, .34, .42, .50; Y0-n; RI.27, .35, .43, .51)
(X1-n; RI.28, .36, .44, .52; Y1-n; RI.29, .37, .45, .53)
(X2-n; RI.30, .38, .46, .54; Y2-n; RI.31, .39, .47, .55)
(X3-n; RI.32, .40, .48, .56; Y3-n; RI.33, .41, .49, .57)

Notes 1. The output of each channel can be seen on the SX Tool at Alg.
Item NCMn (RI.60 to RI.63).
2. X values must be entered in ascending order and the same number
may not be entered twice. Unlike Algorithm 16, the outputs for
inputs outside of the defined range are as follows:
for X<X0, Y=Y0
for X>X3, Y=Y3
3. Each channel of the module can be put in Hold Mode by entering
the value 1 in Alg. Item PMnHDC (RI.70 Bits X1 to X4) on the
SX Tool or by the PLC. The channel output may be modified by a
supervisory system when in Hold Mode.
can be displayed.

supervisory system.

Algorithm 24 - Each channel of an 8-channel calculator has an output which is the

Eight-Channel result of an algebraic expression of two input variables. When an input
Calculator is not connected a value of 1 is assumed and the corresponding
(Version 1.1 or constant (Kn) must be set to the required value. If the denominator is
Later) 0 the equation outputs the last reliable calculation.
The following show how the calculations are actually performed:
(K1-n * I1-n) + (K2-n * I2-n)
(K1-n * I1-n) - (K2-n * I2-n)
(K1-n * I1-n) * (K2-n * I2-n)
(K1-n * I1-n) / (K2-n * I2-n)
MIN (K1-n * I1-n, K2-n * I2-n)
MAX (K1-n * I1-n, K2-n * I2-n)

Via the GX Tool
Click on PM in the toolbar, select Numeric, then Eight-Calculator
and position the module (box) on the screen. Select the module and
then Data to call up the Data Window. At the Ch #n Equation Type
field, enter the value to describe the equation type:
0 = Disabled
1 = Addition
2 = Subtraction
3 = Multiplication
4 = Division
5 = Minimum Select
6 = Maximum Select
Then enter the constant values for the different channels by selecting
the Constant K1, Constant K2, etc. fields and entering values for the
desired calculation.
Make connections between numeric source points and module inputs
I1-n@ and I2-n@.
Via the SX Tool

structure of the Alg. Item FUNn (RI.02 to RI.09) defines the function
of the algorithm channel where n = 1-8.
X3X2X1 = 000 Disabled
X3X2X1 = 001 Addition
X3X2X1 = 010 Subtraction
X3X2X1 = 011 Multiplication
X3X2X1 = 100 Division
X3X2X1 = 101 Minimum
X3X2X1 = 110 Maximum
I1-n@ = Input Variable 1 Channel n.
(even numbers RI.10 to RI.24)
I2-n@ = Input Variable 2 Channel n.
(odd numbers RI.11 to RI.25)
K1-n = Constant 1 Channel n.
(even numbers RI.26 to RI.40)
K2-n = Constant 2 Channel n.
(odd numbers RI.27to RI.41)

Notes 1. The output of each channel can be seen on the SX Tool at Alg.
Item NCMn (RI.60 to RI.67).
2. Each channel of the module can be put in Hold Mode by entering
the value 1 in Alg. Item PMnHDC (RI.70, Bits X1 to X8) on the
SX Tool or by the PLC. The channel output may be modified in
the Hold Mode by a supervisory system.
can be displayed.
4. To build up more complex equations the output of one channel
may be connected to the input of another channel to form a chain.
Note that outputs only get transferred to inputs when the module
begins execution so that there is always a delay of one second
between individual channel calculations in one module when they
are chained.

supervisory system.

In-m@ Analog input connections to an 8-channel calculator module.

Time Program The real time clock module handles all the features related to the
Functions calendar and real time information. It is based on a hardware real time
clock and on software tasks which perform the daylight saving time
Real Time Clock
changes, the day of the week definition, and holiday status.
The following variables are available and may be displayed on the front
panel of the controller:
Year: Years 1990-2020 (up to 2035 in
versions 1.4, 2.3 and 3.3)
Month: Month of the year 1-12
Day: Day of the month 1-31
Hour: Hours since midnight 0-23
Minute: Minutes after the hour 0-59
Day Of Week: 1=MONDAY
2=TUESDAY
3=WEDNESDAY
4=THURSDAY
5=FRIDAY
6=SATURDAY
7=SUNDAY
Exception Day: 8=HOLIDAY
The actual day of the week is automatically calculated as a function of
the programmed calendar day at the power-up initialization and at
every date change.
Daylight Saving This function automatically advances the current time by one hour at
the beginning of the daylight saving period and sets the current time
back by one hour at the end of the period.
The daylight saving period begins at time 00:00 of the START DATE
and ends at 01:00 of the END DATE.
Via the GX Tool

To set daylight saving dates, Select Edit-Global Data. At the
DL Savings Start Date (MM/DD) field, enter the date of the Sunday
when the next daylight saving period begins. At the DL Savings End
Date (MM/DD) field, enter the date of the Sunday when the current or
next daylight saving period ends.
(This function can not be accessed by the SX Tool, but can be executed
from the front panel of the DX controller.)

Exception Days An exception day table, composed of up to 30 entries, determines
exceptions for the day of the week status. On exception days, holiday
status will be set and the day number will be set to 8.
Each entry in the table is described by a START DATE and an END
DATE in the format [Month] [Day].
When the DX is at day 8, the only schedules that will operate are
ones that have been programmed with an 8 in the Days for Event.
Examples:
For a holiday of December 24 and 25, enter 12:24 as Start and 12:25 as
End. For a holiday of January 1, enter 01:01 as Start and 01:01 as End.
Via the GX Tool

Click on PM in the toolbar, select Exception Days, and position the
the Data Window. At the #n Start: field, enter the date to start the
holiday. At the #n End: field, enter the date to stop the holiday. For a
single day holiday, enter the same date for start and end.
(This function can not be accessed by the SX Tool, but can be executed
from the front panel of the DX-9100 Controller.)
Time Schedule The eight time schedule modules each provide the control of a logic
Configuration output as a function of a programmable event schedule, the day of the
week, exception days condition, and of the real time clock.
One time schedule can contain up to eight entries, each containing the
following information:
START TIME: [Hour][Minute]
STOP TIME: [Hour][Minute]
DAYS FOR EVENT: To select on which Days Of the Week (Mon,
Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun and holiday),
the START/STOP command will be issued;
the command may be enabled for more than
one day.
The event on time can be extended to cover a period greater than one
day by programming the STOP TIME of one event as 24:00 and the
START TIME of the next event as 00:00. If, for one event, the Stop
time is earlier than the Start time, the DX (when downloaded) will
automatically change the Stop time to one minute after the Start time.
The time schedule module is executed each minute. If external forcing
conditions are not present, the event schedule is examined to verify
whether a start/stop command is programmed for the actual time and
day of the week.

Via the GX Tool
Click on PM in the toolbar, select Time Schedule, and position the
the Data Window. Set the Start and Stop times in the respective fields:
Start Time Event #n
Stop Time Event #n
Then, at the Days for Event #n field, enter a value corresponding to
the desired schedule:
1=MONDAY
2=TUESDAY
3=WEDNESDAY
4=THURSDAY
5=FRIDAY
6=SATURDAY
7=SUNDAY
8=HOLIDAY (Exception Day)
0=ALL DAYS (Monday to Sunday - Not Holiday)
9=WEEKDAYS (Monday to Friday)
Example: for days Monday, Tuesday, and Wednesday, enter 123.
Output Type Via the SX Tool

Bit X1 of Item TSnOPT (RI.00) defines the output type. It should be
set to 0 for logic output type, which is the only available output type
in the current versions of firmware. (This setting is available only
through the SX Tool.)
Overriding the Three logic inputs can override the normal function of the time
Time Schedule schedule module:
The External Extension Connection defines a logic variable which,
if ON at a programmed stop time of the module, extends the ON
period for a programmed extension time. (The extension can also
be set from the DX front panel or by a supervisory system when
the module output is ON. See Note 4 in the following Notes
section.)
The ON Forcing Connection forces the output to ON, if the
connection equals 1.
The OFF Forcing Connection forces the output to OFF if the
connection equals 1.
The logic forcing inputs are executed according to following
priority: forcing to OFF, forcing to ON, and extension.

Via the GX Tool
Select the time schedule module and then Data to call up the Data
Window.
Make connections between External Forcing ON source points and
TSnON@ inputs. Similar connections for Off Forcing TSnOF@ and
for Extension External TSnEX@ can be made as required.
At the Extension Time field, enter a value for the desired extension
time in minutes (0 - 255).
Via the SX Tool

Set the connections via the following Items:
The External Extension Connection Item = TSnEX@ (RI.01).
The ON Forcing Connection Item = TSnON@ (RI.02).
The OFF Forcing Connection Item = TSnOF@ (RI.03).
The value in Item TSnXTM, (RI.04) defines the extension time (0-255
minutes).
Notes 1. The time, date, year, extension time, daylight saving dates, time
schedule output, and start/stop event days and times and can be
read and modified using the DX front panel. See Display Panel
and Keypads in the DX-9100 Extended Digital Controller Technical
Bulletin.
2. The extension can be set from the DX front panel. See Display
Panel and Keypads in the DX-9100 Extended Digital Controller
Technical Bulletin.
3. On the SX Tool, the value in Item TSnTIM (RI.05) indicates the
time in minutes to the next change of the logic output TSnOUT.
This output will be active when a change of output within the
current or next day is scheduled.
4. The bit values in Item TSnSTA (RI.06) indicate on the SX Tool
the time schedule status as follows:
X1= 1 TSnHLD Time schedule module is in Hold Mode. The
output of the module (TSnOUT) can be
modified in the Hold Mode.
X2 TSnOUT Output status and control is the output of the
time schedule module, and can be used as
logic input to any of the programmable or
output modules.
X3 = 1 TSnEXT Extension command is set by an extension
override command from the DX front panel or
supervisory system. This command toggles the
extension status (TSnEXS) on and off.
X4 TSnNXO Indicates the next scheduled output of the time
schedule module (0 or 1).

X5 = 1 TSnEXS Indicates an active extension from the
DX front panel or supervisory system.
X6 = 1 TSnXDI Indicates an active extension from a
logical (digital) input (via the External
Extension Connection).
X7 = 1 TSnON Indicates a forced ON status.
X8 = 1 TSnOFF Indicates a forced OFF status.
GX Tool or SX Tool.
5. When an extension is set from the DX front panel or by a
supervisory system, the extension status (TSnEXS) of the module
is true (Bit X5 = 1). An extension via the DX front panel or
supervisory system is automatically reset when the extension
period ends.
When an extension is set by the External Extension Connection,
the extension status TSnXDI of the module is true (Bit X6 = 1) as
long as the output status (TSnOUT) is true, and remains true until
the end of the extension period when the extension status
(TSnXDI) and the output status (TSnOUT) go false.
6. When making a connection from a time schedule module to an
optimal start/stop module, the Items TSnOUT, TSnNXO, and
TSnTIM must be connected via the SX Tool. If using the GX
Tool, when TSnOUT is connected, the TSnNXO and TSnTIM are
connected internally.
7. When a start or stop time of an event in a time schedule module is
changed, the time schedule module will take up to one minute to
update its output.
8. Time schedules may be uploaded, modified and downloaded at the
Metasys Operator Workstation (OWS). Refer to Scheduling under
the Feature Software Section of the Metasys Technical Manual
(FAN 636).

TSnEXS A 1 when a time schedule module has its extension
enabled by a supervisory system or a DX front panel
command.
TSnOUT A 1 when the real time is currently between the start
and stop times of an event of the time schedule module
and the current day is specified for that event.

Destination Points
TSnOF@ A connection to externally force the output of a time
schedule to OFF.
TSnON@ A connection to externally force the output of a time
schedule to ON.
TSnEX@ A connection to the external extension of a time
schedule.
Optimal Two optimal start/stop modules each calculate the minimum time
Start/Stop needed to bring a controlled zone temperature to a desired condition at
Configuration occupancy time under heating and/or cooling conditions. The modules
also calculate the optimal stop time to maintain the desired conditions
up to the end of the occupancy time.
When an optimal start/stop module is configured for heating and
cooling, the module assumes:
a Heating Mode for startup if the zone temperature is below
setpoint
a Cooling Mode for startup if the zone temperature is above
setpoint
a Heating Mode for shutdown if the outdoor temperature is below
the zone on setpoint
a Cooling Mode if the outdoor temperature is above the zone on
setpoint
Via the GX Tool

Click on PM in the toolbar, select Optimum Start/Stop, and position
call up the Data Window. At the Module Type field, enter the value
corresponding to the desired configuration:
1 = Heating
2 = Cooling
3 = Heating and Cooling
Via the SX Tool

The OSnOPT (RI.00) defines the operating mode of the optimal
start/stop module by setting Bit X1 and X2 as follows:
X2X1 = 00 Not used
X2X1 = 01 Heating Mode (heating plant only)
X2X1 = 10 Cooling Mode (cooling plant only)
X2X1 = 11 Heating and Cooling Mode (plant heats and cools)
The status of the mode can be seen at Item OSnSTA, Bit X3,
(OSn HEAT) where 0 = Cooling and 1 = Heating.
Optimal Start The adaptive process monitors how quickly the temperature reaches the
Adaptive Process halfway point between the setpoint and actual temperature:
If it takes less than the calculated warmup time based on the
building factor, then the building factor will be decreased so that
the next calculation will result in a shorter warmup time, all other
factors being equal.
If it takes more than the calculated warmup time based on the
building factor, then the building factor will be increased so that
the next calculation will result in a longer warmup time, all other
factors being equal.
The adaptive process calculation only takes place when the Optimal
Start module actually starts the plant.
Temperature Module updates

Control Range (Comfort Zone) building factor
Zone Air Set Point (SP)
delta Time
Optimal Start Curve
delta Temp
Zone Air Temperature (ZT) Purge

Time
Purge
Time
Maximum Startup Time
Time
Start Plant Occupancy (minutes)
(OSnOUT=1) (TSnOUT=1)
(OSnPRE=1) (OSnPRE=0)
(TSnOUT=0) (OSnOUT=1) dxcgosmh
Figure 24: Optimal Start Module in Heating Mode
The required startup time is calculated as follows:

Warmup Time = Building Factor ( Heating) x ( SP ZT + TC)2 + PT
( HTD OT )
TC = when HTD > OT , else TC = 0
4
Cooldown Time = Building Factor ( Cooling) x ( ZT SP + TC)2 + PT
OT CTD
TC = when OT > CTD, else TC = 0
4

When the Zone Air Temperature has risen (when in heating mode) or
fallend (when in cooling mode) halfway towards the Zone Set Point,
the module updates the corresponding Buildling Factor value using the
following calculation:
(100 FW ) x OBF + FW x deltaTime /(deltaTemp ) 2
NBF =
100
If the Zone Air Temperature does not reach the halfway point, the
corresponding Building Factor is automatically increased by a fixed
amount equal to 10% of the existing value.
The Building Factor is not updated if the initial Zone Air Temperature
is within the Control Range.
NBF = New Building Factor PT = Min. Heat/Cool Time (Purge Time)
FW = Filter Weight HTD = Outdoor Design Temp. Heating
OBF = Old Building Factor CTD = Outdoor Design Temp. Cooling
SP = Zone Air Setpoint Temp. TC = Temperature Compensation
ZT = Zone Air Temperature OT = Outdoor Temperature
The Building Factor (Heating) is updated in the heating mode and the
Building Factor (Cooling) is updated in the cooling mode.
Optimal Stop If the difference between the outdoor air and the zone temperature is
Operation small, the heating equipment can be stopped at an earlier time than if
the difference is large.
Zone Temperature
Off
Control Range (Comfort Zone) Bias in
On Cooling Mode degrees
Setpoint Heating Mode Off
Bias in
degrees
Maximum Optimal Stop Time

Time
Optimal Stop Time
(OSnOUT=1) Stop Plant Vacancy
(OSnSTO=0) (OSnOUT=0) (unoccupied)
(TSnOUT=1) (OSnSTO=1) (OSnOUT=0)
(TSnOUT=1) (OSnSTO=0)
(TSnOUT=0) dxhcmtb
Figure 25: Optimal Stop Module in Heating/Cooling Mode

Zone Temp. Off Bias x Shutdown Building Heat./ Cool. Factor
Optimal Stop Time =
ZoneTemp. OutdoorTemp.
or = Maximum Optimal Stop Time

(whichever is least).
If the Zone Temperature (ZT) is not within the Control Range (CRNG),
or Outdoor Temperature (OT) is not connected, the Optimal Stop
algorithm is not executed and the output OSnOUT is reset at the
normal vacancy time (i.e., the Optimal Stop Time set at 0).
Zone The Zone Temperature is an analog input to the module which gives
Temperature the actual temperature of the conditioned zone.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the Zone Temperature source point and the
OSZT@ input point of the OSn module.
Via the SX Tool
Configure this function by entering the source address at Item
OSnZT@ (RI.01).
Outdoor The Outdoor Temperature is an analog input to the module which

Temperature gives the actual outdoor temperature. If the input is not connected, the
module does not compensate for outdoor temperature and the optimal
stop function is disabled.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the Outdoor Temperature source point and
the OSOT@ input point of the OSn module.
Via the SX Tool

Configure this function by entering the source address at Item
OSnOT@ (RI.02).
Zone This is the desired zone temperature at the scheduled occupancy time.
Temperature If the connection is made, it will be the active setpoint. If there is no
ON Setpoint connection, the value entered as the Zone Temperature setpoint will be
used.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the Zone Temperature ON Setpoint source
point and the OSSP@ input point of the OSn module. If connected, the
value will replace the value entered at Zone Temp. SP.
Or, for a fixed setpoint, select the OSn module and then Data to call up
the Data Window. At the Zone Temp. SP field, enter the desired
zone temperature at occupancy.

Via the SX Tool
Configure the active setpoint by entering the source address at Item
Location OSnSP@ (RI.03). If no connection is made, the value entered
at Item OSnSP (RI.21) will be used.
Zone This is an analog input or value that determines the maximum change
Temperature in zone temperature during the optimal stop period. If the input is not
Off Bias connected, the module will use the value entered as the Zone Temp.
Off Bias. For a heating plant only, the value must be negative; and for
a cooling plant only, the value must be positive. For the heating and
cooling mode an absolute value is used, and the heating or cooling
mode is automatically determined by the module from the outdoor
temperature. Refer to Figure 25, Optimal Stop Module in
Heating/Cooling Mode.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the Off Bias source point and the OSOB@
input point of the OSn module. If there is no connection, the module
will use the fixed value entered at the Zn Tmp OFF SP Bias field. Or
for a fixed bias, select the OSn module and then Data to call up the
Data Window. Select the Zn Tmp Off Sp Bias field, and enter the
maximum change in zone temperature during the optimal stop period.
Via the SX Tool

The software connection is configured by entering the source address at
the OSnOB@ Item location (RI.04). If no connection is made, the
value entered at Item OSnOB (RI.22) will be used.
Disable Module This connection is a logic input which disables the operation of the
module. If the input is not connected, the module will use the default
value 0 and the module will be enabled. When disabled, the Optimal
Start module will simply output the start and stop commands of the
Time Schedule module to which it is connected.
Via the GX Tool

Make a connection between the disable module source point and the
OSD1@ input point of the OSn module.
Via the SX Tool

Enter the logic source address at Item OSnDI@ (RI.05).
Disable Adaptive This connection is a logic input which disables the adaptive operation
Action of the module. If the input is not connected, the module will use the
default value 0, and the module will be adaptive. The adaptation should
only be disabled after the module has obtained some history and the
configuration has been uploaded for safe keeping.

Via the GX Tool
Make a connection between the Disable Adaptive Action source point
and the OSDA@ input point of the OSn module.
Via the SX Tool

Enter the logic source address under OPT. ST. at Item OSnDA@
(RI.06).
Time Schedule The connection at OSnTS@ is a logic input that indicates the
Command occupancy period of the zone controlled by the module. The source is a
Source TSnOUT variable from a time schedule module. The optimal start
module uses the time information from the time schedule module to
determine the normal occupancy time and to calculate earlier start and
stop times.
Via the GX Tool
Only TSnOUT logic variables may be selected.

Note: The Next Output and Time to Next Output mentioned
below will automatically be connected by the GX Tool.
Make a connection between the TSnOUT source point and the OSTS@
input point of the OSn module.
Via the SX Tool

Enter the logic source address under OPT. ST. at Item OSnTS@
(RI.07).
Next Output
(SX only.) The connection at OSnNX@ (RI.08) is a logic input that
indicates the status of the next Start/Stop Command. The software
connection is configured by entering the source address at the
OSnNX@ Item location. The source is normally the TSnNXO variable
from the time schedule module connected to the OSnTS@ (RI.07)
Item.
Time to Next Output

(SX only.) The connection at OSnTIM@ (RI.09) is a numerical input
that indicates the time in minutes to the next output. The source is
normally the TSnTIM variable from the time schedule module
connected to the OSnTS@ Item (RI.07). The software connection is
configured by entering the source address at the OSnTIM@ Item
(RI.09) location.
Minimum This parameter is a number which defines the minimum time the AHU
Heat/Cool Time or other equipment should begin operating before occupancy [minutes]
to condition the space to comfort setpoint.
Via the GX Tool
Select the OSn module and then Data to call up the Data Window.
Select the Min Startup Time field, and enter a value in minutes.
Via the SX Tool

Enter a value under OPT. ST. at Item OSnPURGE (RI.10) in
minutes.
Maximum Startup This parameter is a number which defines the time period (minutes)
Time given for the module to calculate when to start the heating or air
conditioning equipment before occupancy. The module begins its
calculation when the maximum startup time is equal to the occupancy
time minus the current time. This parameter is used to limit the startup
time, and consequently the energy used; if its value is too small the
space may not reach comfort setpoint by occupancy time under extreme
weather conditions.
Via the GX Tool

Select the Max Startup Time field, and enter a value in minutes.
Via the SX Tool

Enter a value under OPT. ST. at Item OSnMAXST (RI.11) in
minutes.
Maximum This is a number which defines the time period (minutes) given for the
Shutdown Time module to calculate when to stop heating or air conditioning equipment
before the end of occupancy. The module begins its calculation when
the maximum shutdown time is equal to the normal vacancy time
minus the current time.
Via the GX Tool

Select the Max Shutdown Time field, and enter a value in minutes.
Via the SX Tool

Enter a value under OPT. ST. at Item OSnMAXSO (RI.12) in
minutes.
Start Mode This factor is a number, expressed in min/degrees2, that defines the
Building Factor initial building factor for the first Optimal Start heating calculation. It
(Heating) will be automatically updated by the module when adapting is enabled.
(For an understanding of the effect of different values, refer to the
calculations under Optimal Start Adaptive Process.)

Via the GX Tool
Select the Start Heat. Factor field, and enter an appropriate value or
accept the default.
After a few weeks of operation, upload the configuration with the new
value for record purposes and stop the adaptive process. (During
seasonal transitions, the adaptive process may take longer to stabilize.)
Note: A new download to the controller will override any adaptively
changed values with the values stored in the download file.
Via the SX Tool

Enter a value under OPT. ST. at Item OSnBHK (RI.13).
Start Mode This factor is a number, expressed in min/degrees2, which defines the
Building Factor initial building factor for the first Optimal Start cooling calculation. It
(Cooling) will be automatically updated by the module when adapting is enabled.
(For an understanding of the effect of different values, refer to the
calculations under Optimal Start Adaptive Process.)
Via the GX Tool

Select the Start Cool. Factor field, and enter an appropriate value or
accept the default.
After a few weeks of operation, upload the configuration with the new
value for record purposes and stop the adaptive process. (During
seasonal transitions, the adaptive process may take longer to stabilize.)
Note: A new download to the controller will override any adaptively
changed values with the values stored in the download file.
Via the SX Tool

Enter a value under OPT. ST. at Item OSnBCK (RI.14).
Stop Mode This factor is a number, expressed in min/degrees, which defines the
Building Factor building factor for the Optimal Stop heating calculation.
(Heating)
Via the GX Tool
Select the Stop Heat Factor field, and enter an appropriate value or
accept the default.
Via the SX Tool

Enter a value under OPT. ST. at Item OSnSBHK (RI.15).

Stop Mode This factor is a number, expressed in min/degrees, which defines the
Building Factor building factor for the Optimal Stop cooling calculation.
(Cooling)
Via the GX Tool
Select the Stop Cool Factor field, and enter an appropriate value or
accept the default.
Via the SX Tool

Enter a value under OPT. ST. at Item OSnSBCK (RI.16).
Adaptive Control This is a number, expressed in percent, that defines the proportion of
(Filter Weight) the latest calculated factor used to update the stored building factor.
One percent is a slow update (100 days); 10% is a relatively fast update
(10 days); 0% stops the update of building factors and has the same
effect as disabling the adaptive process. (For information on the effect
of different values, refer to the calculations under Optimal Start
Adaptive Process.)
Via the GX Tool

Select the Filter Weight field, and enter a value from 0 to 100%.
Via the SX Tool

Enter a value under OPT. ST. at Item OSnFW (RI.17) from 0 to
100%.
Outdoor Air This is a number, expressed in degrees, defining the coldest outdoor
Design Temp. temperature that the heating equipment is designed to handle. When
(Heating) the outdoor air is below this value, the module will not update the
building factors.
Note: For North American applications, these values change based on
geographical location, and can be obtained from the ASHRAE
Handbook of Fundamentals, Chapter 24, Table 1, Climatic
Conditions for the United States.
Via the GX Tool

Select the OA Design Temp Htg field, and enter the design
temperature.
Via the SX Tool

Enter a value under OPT. ST. at Item OSnHTD (RI.18).

Outdoor Air This is a number, expressed in degrees, defining the warmest outdoor
Design Temp. temperature that the cooling equipment is designed to handle. When
(Cooling) the outdoor air is above this value, the module will not update the
building factors.
Note: For North American applications, these values change based on
geographical location, and can be obtained from the ASHRAE
Handbook of Fundamentals, Chapter 24, Table 1, Climatic
Conditions for the United States.
Via the GX Tool

Select the OA Design Temp Clg field, and enter the design
temperature.
Via the SX Tool

Enter a value under OPT. ST. at Item OSnCTD (RI.19).
Control Range (+/-) This is a number, expressed in degrees, that defines the temperature
band above and below the zone air temperature setpoint within which
the heating/cooling equipment is regulated. The Building Factor is not
updated if the initial Zone Air Temperature is within the Control
Range. (See the figure under Optimal Start Adaptive Process.)
Via the GX Tool

Select the Control Range field, and enter the temperature band.
Via the SX Tool

Enter a value under OPT. ST. at Item OSnCRNG (RI.20).
Notes 1. The value in OSnTIM (RI.23) indicates the calculated startup time
(in minutes) for the currently active optimal start period (during
unoccupied period) or for the last optimal start period to have been
active (during occupied period) (Version 1.1 or later).
2. The bit values in Item OSnSTA (RI.24) indicate the Operating
Status as follows:
X1 = 1 OSnHLD puts the optimal start/stop module in Hold
Mode. The output of the module (OSnOUT)
can be modified in the Hold Mode.
X2 OSnOUT output status and control is the Output of the
optimal start/stop module, and can be used as
logic input to any of the programmable or
output modules, and will typically be used to
start the main heating, cooling or AHU
equipment.

X3 = 1 OSnHEAT indicates when the module is in Heating
Mode and can be used as logic input to any
of the programmable or output modules.
X4 = 1 OSnPRE indicates when the module is in precooling
or preheating and can be used as logic input
to any of the programmable or output
modules.
X5 = 1 OSnSTO indicates that the output has been reset
(OSnOUT = 0) during the optimal stop
period, and can be used as a logic input to
any of the programmable or output modules.
X6 OSnIN status of the command input (usually time
schedule TSnOUT).
X7 = 1 OSnADP adapting algorithm disabled.

X8 = 1 OSnDAS module disabled.
GX Tool or SX Tool.
3. Optimal Start/Stop values cannot be viewed directly from the
DX front panel.

OSnHEAT A 1 when Optimal Start module is in the Heating
Mode.
OSnOUT A 1 when the Optimal Start module requires
equipment to be ON. It is the controlling output of an
Optimal Start module to START/STOP heating or
cooling equipment.
OSnPRE A 1 while the Optimal Start module is in the Pre-
conditioning Mode (will turn OFF at occupancy).
OSnSTO A 1 when the Optimal Start module is in the Optimal
Stop Mode (will turn OFF at vacancy - unoccupied).

OSnDA@ The connection to disable the adaptive action of an
Optimal Start/Stop module.
OSnDI@ The connection to disable the Optimal Start/Stop
module.
OSnOB@ The connection to the Off Setpoint Bias, which replaces
the entered value when connected in an Optimal
Start/Stop module.

OSnOT@ The connection for the Outdoor Air Temperature sensor
of an Optimal Start/Stop module.
OSnSP@ The connection for the Optimal Start Zone Temperature
setpoint. If connected, it replaces the entered setpoint.
OSnTS@ The connection in an Optimal Start/Stop module for the
time schedule that determines when the building is
occupied.
OSnZT@ The connection for the Zone Temperature sensor in an
Optimal Start/Stop module.
Programmable The DX-9100 operating system provides a software-implemented

Logic Control Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). Every second the PLC module
Configuration executes a user-defined program which operates on a 2,048-bit memory
area containing an image of the hardware digital input/outputs, logic
Introduction
variables from function modules, and digital constants. In the memory
area each input, output, and logic variable has its own, pre-allocated
address. Variables in the memory area are frozen before the execution
of the program in the PLC module, and the resulting changes in the
logic variables are transferred out of the memory area to the
appropriate hardware or function modules at the end of the module
execution.
Hardware Inputs
Hardware Outputs PLC Memory Area
Logic Variables
User-defined
PLC Module
Program
dxplc1tb
Figure 26: Programmable Logic Control

PLC User-Defined A user-defined program is a sequence of instruction blocks which
Program contain logic instructions, each leading to a PLC result status. An
instruction block always begins with a LOAD or LOAD NOT (like an
IF or IF NOT) logic instruction which initializes the PLC result status,
and normally terminates with an instruction performing an output to the
memory area using the final result status (THEN).
LOAD and LOAD NOT instructions may also be used within an
instruction block to create a logic sub-block.
In the GX-9100 Graphic Programming Software, the instructions are
laid out in eight pages of ladder diagrams, each containing eight lines
of up to eight instructions, graphically depicted as shown below.
The following instructions are available: (1 = On, 0 = Off).
Instruction LOAD
This instruction begins the operation of an instruction block; the value
of the addressed variable (0 or 1) is placed in the result status. This
instruction also begins the operation of an ANDB or ORB sub-block
and saves the current value of the result status; the value of the
addressed variable is placed in the sub-block result status. (Think of
LOAD as an IF statement.) In the diagram, the logic variable DI1
(Digital Input 1) is shown.
LOAD Result Status DI1

Status Of
Addressed
Variable L
1 1
0 0
IF THEN
Figure 27: Load
Instruction
Instruction LOAD NOT

This instruction begins the operation of an instruction block; the
inverted value of the addressed variable (0 or 1) is placed in the result
status. This instruction also begins the operation of an ANDB or ORB
sub-block and saves the current value of the result status; the value of
the addressed variable is placed in the sub-block result status. In the
diagram, the logic variable AIH8 (high alarm status of Analog Input 8)
is shown.
LOAD NOT Result Status AIH8

Status Of
Addressed L
Variable
0 1
1 0
IF NOT THEN
Figure 28: Load Not
Instruction

Instruction AND
This instruction calculates the logical AND between the value of the
addressed variable and the result status; the result is placed in the result
status. This instruction may also be used within sub-blocks. In the
diagram, the logic variable DI2 (Digital Input 2) is shown.
Previous AND Status of Result

Result Addressed Status DI1 DI2
Status Variable
1 1 1
0 1 0 L
1 0 0
0 0 0 Figure 29: AND
IF AND THEN Instruction
Instruction AND NOT

This instruction calculates the logical AND between the inverted value
of the addressed variable and the result status; the result is placed in the
result status. This instruction may also be used within sub-blocks. In
the diagram, the logic variable DI3 (Digital Input 3) is shown.
Previous AND NOT Result

Result Status of Status
DI1 DI3
Status Addressed
Variable L
1 0 1
0 0 0
Figure 30: AND NOT
1 1 0
Instruction
0 1 0
IF AND NOT THEN

Instruction OR
This instruction calculates the logical OR between the value of the
addressed variable and the result status; the result is placed in the result
status. This instruction may also be used within sub-blocks. In the
diagram, the logic variable DI4 (Digital Input 4) is shown.
Note: Only one addressed variable can be ORd, whereas an ORB
allows a block of variables linked by AND and OR instructions
to be ORd.
Previous OR Status of Result Status
DI1
Result Status Addressed
Variable
L
1 1 1
0 1 1
DI4
1 0 1
0 0 0
IF OR THEN
Figure 31: OR
Instruction
Instruction OR NOT
This instruction calculates the logical OR between the inverted value of
the addressed variable and the result status; the result is placed in the
result status. This instruction may also be used within sub-blocks. In
the diagram, the logic variable DI5 (Digital Input 5) is shown.
Previous OR NOT Result Status

Result Status DI1
1 0 1
0 0 1 L
1 1 1
0 1 0 DI5
IF OR NOT THEN
Figure 32: OR
NOT Instruction

Instruction ANDB (AND-Block)
This instruction terminates a logic sub-block and indicates that a
logical AND operation must be performed between the sub-block result
status and the result status saved before the execution of the sub-block.
No logic variable is referenced.
Note: In the GX Tool an AND Block is started with a LOAD or
LOADNOT instruction and closed by an ANDB instruction.
Previous Sub-block Final AND BLOCK

Result Result Result
Status Status Status DI1 XT1DI1 XT1DI2
B
1 1 1 L L
0 1 0
XT1DI3
1 0 0
0 0 0
IF AND THEN
Figure 33: AND-Block

Instruction ORB Instruction
This instruction terminates a logic sub-block
and indicates that a logical OR operation must be performed between
the sub-block result status and the result status saved before the
execution of the sub-block.
An ORB allows a block of variables linked by AND and OR
instructions to be ORd, whereas a single OR allows only one
addressed variable to be ORd.
Previous Sub-block Final DI1 DI2

Result Status Result Status Result Status
L
1 1 1
XT1DI1 XT1DI2 OR BLOCK
0 1 1 L
1 0 1
Figure 34: OR-
0 0 0
IF OR THEN
Block Instruction
An OR Block may be nested within an AND Block. In this case, the

ORB must come before an ANDB.
Note: In the GX Tool an ORB must be declared before defining the
block to be ORd for graphic formatting purposes.
AND BLOCK
DI1 XT1DI1 XT1DI2

B
L L
DI4 DI5
L
DO3 OR BLOC K
Figure 35: OR Block Nested Within AND Block

Instruction OUT
This instruction causes the value of the result status, obtained from the
preceding logic instructions in the instruction block, to be transferred to
the addressed memory location. (Think of OUT as a THEN statement.)
In this example the result is transferred to the Logic Result Status
Variable LRS1.
Previous OUT to DI1 DI2 LRS1

Variable L
0 0
DI3
1 1
IF THEN
Figure 36: OUT Instruction

Instruction OUT NOT
This instruction causes the inverted value of the result status, obtained
from the preceding logic instructions in the instruction block, to be
transferred to the addressed memory location. In this example the result
is transferred to the Logic Result Status Variable LRS2.
Previous OUT NOT to DI1 DI2 LRS2
Variable L
0 1
DI3
1 0
IF THEN
Figure 37: OUT NOT

Instruction
Instruction COS
This logic instruction is intended to detect a positive change in the
value of the result status obtained from the preceding logic instructions
in the instruction block. The result status calculated in the actual
execution cycle is compared with the result status obtained in the
previous cycle and retained in the memory location addressed in the
COS instruction. If the result status has changed from a value of 0 to
1 in the actual execution cycle, the result status is set to 1,
otherwise it is set to 0.
Conditional instructions following a COS instruction will be executed
only once after a change-of-state in the preceding logic expression. The
instruction below detects a positive change of status.

Previous COS Result
Result Status Status
1 scan 0 0
2 scan 1 1
3 scan 1 0
4 scan 1 0
5 scan 0 0
6 scan 1 1
DI1
L COS
Figure 38: COS Instruction
Instruction SET
This instruction is executed only if the result status has a value 1 and
causes the addressed memory location to be set to 1. In this example
the variable LRS3 will be set if the logic block result is true. In this
example the variable LRS3 will be set if the logic block result is true.
Previous SET DI1 DI2 LRS3
Result Status
0 No action L SET
1 1
IF 1 THEN 1 Figure 39: SET Instruction
Note that normally each variable set by the PLC will also need to be
reset by the PLC unless it is reset by some other module, by controller
initialization, or by a supervisory system command.
Instruction RST
This instruction is executed only if the result status has a value 1 and
causes the addressed memory location to be set to 0. In this example
the variable LRS3 will be reset (set to 0) if the logic block result is true.
In this example the variable LRS3 will be reset (set to 0) if the logic
block result is true.
Previous RST DI1 DI2 LRS3
Result Status
0 No action L RST
1 0
IF 1 THEN 0
Figure 40: RESET
Instruction

Instruction END (SX Only)
This instruction ends the execution of the PLC Program and sets the
result status to the 0 state.
Provided that no power failure occurs, the next PLC execution cycle
will begin with the logic instruction in the specified address field. This
allows the skipping of initialization routines in the lowest address
locations.
After a power failure the PLC execution cycle will begin at Address
0000.
0000
Power-up
Power Failure
Instructions
RSR
0100 Rest of
Program
END 0100
Figure 41: END Instruction/ Program Execution After Power

Failure
Instruction RSR (GX Only)

In the GX-9100 Graphic Configuration Software the RSR (restart)
element marks the place where the PLC execution cycle will begin
when there has been no power failure. Immediately upon power up, the
code before and after RSR will run; consecutive scans will only run the
code after RSR.
RSR L
Figure 42: RSR Block

Instruction NOP
This instruction has no operation and causes the PLC to skip this line
of the program. It is normally used in the GX Tool to make the logic
easier to read and to fill in unused graphic elements.
Via the GX Tool

Click on PM in the toolbar, select PLC, and position the PLC module
(box) on the screen. Double-click on PLCn to enter instructions into
the ladder diagram.
The instruction line consists of instructions (such as LOAD) and logic
variable labels (such as DI1, Digital Input 1). Following is an example
of how to construct a simple logic program using the GX Tool:
Specification: If occupied is ON and the outdoor air temperature is
below 55F (12.8C), start the hot water pump.
Clicking the mouse on the upper left dot calls up the following choices:
NOP, LOAD, LOAD NOT, RSR.
Selecting LOAD is similar to typing IF:
If occupied is ON would be done in this way:
TS1OUT
where load was selected by clicking on the left dot and TS1OUT
(occupied) was selected by clicking on |L|, then TS, then TS1OUT.
AND the outdoor temperature is below 55 would be done in

this way:
TS1OUT PM4LS1
Click and select PM4 (comparator),
then PM4LS1
L
(Click to
select AND)
Then click on the next dot to select OUT, as follows:

(Click to
TS1OUT PM4LS1
select OUT) LRS5
Click and select where the result

should go. Usually, this will be an
LRS that can then be connected
to any logic destination.
To complete the specification, LRS5 would be the source point of the

Digital Output defined as the hot water pump.
Via the SX Tool
Instruction lines are divided into three fields:
a field for the instruction code, such as LOAD (CODE#1)
a field to select a bit in a memory logic variable byte, Bit 1-8
a field to address a memory logic variable byte, such as 06
(=DIS; Digital Input Status)
Note: Bits 1-8 of a logic variable are equal to Bits X1-X8 or X9-X16
of the corresponding Item byte or word. See Appendix 4 for a
list of logic variables.
Visual examples of these instructions can be found earlier in
this section, PLC User-Defined Program.
Instruction LOAD [ Code ] [ Bit ] [ Memory Address]

1 1...8 0..255
Instruction LOAD NOT [ Code ] [ Bit ] [ Memory Address]

2 1...8 0..255
Instruction AND [ Code ] [ Bit ] [ Memory Address]

3 1...8 0..255
Instruction AND NOT [ Code ] [ Bit ] [ Memory Address]

4 1...8 0..255
Instruction OR [ Code ] [ Bit ] [ Memory Address]

5 1...8 0..255
Instruction OR NOT [ Code ] [ Bit ] [ Memory Address]

6 1...8 0..255
Instruction ANDB [ Code ] [ Bit ] [ Memory Address]

7 0 0
Instruction ORB [ Code ] [ Bit ] [ Memory Address]

8 0 0

Instruction OUT [ Code ] [ Bit ] [ Memory Address]
9 1...8 0..255
Instruction OUT NOT [ Code ] [ Bit ] [ Memory Address]

10 1...8 0..255
Instruction COS [ Code ] [ Bit ] [ Memory Address]

11 1...8 0..255
Instruction SET [ Code ] [ Bit ] [ Memory Address]

12 1...8 0..255
Instruction RST [ Code ] [ Bit ] [ Memory Address]

13 1...8 0..255
Instruction END [ Code ] [ Program Address]

31 0..511
Instruction NOP [ Code ] [ Bit ] [ Memory Address]

0 0 0
Notes 1. The PLC program can be generated using the GX-9100 Tool. The
program is laid out in the format of a Ladder Diagram and the
graphic software automatically generates the program code for the
PLC module. This ladder cannot be read from the DX front panel.
2. The use of the instruction codes and logic variable memory
addresses is only required for the programming with the SX Tool.
3. On power-up the PLC is executed before the programmable
modules. For more detailed information, refer to Power Up
Conditions - Programmable Logic Controller, further in this
manual.
4. A series of ANDNOT statements followed by an OUTNOT
statement is logically equivalent to a series of OR statements
followed by an OUT statement. In the GX Tool, the use of
ANDNOT statements in one line will more efficiently use the
space available in the ladder logic diagram.

PLC Program I1 I2 I4 B O1
Example L L
I3 I5
I6 I7
L
O 1 = [ ( ( I 1 * I 2 ) + I 3 ) * ( I4 + I5 ) ] + [ I6 * I7 ]
LOAD I1 ; Begin instruction block (IF Input 1 AND Input 2

AND I2 OR Input 3 are true.
OR I3
NOP ; Space
LOAD I4 ; Begin sub-block (AND) AND
OR NOT I5 IF Input 4 OR NOT Input 5
ANDB ; End sub-block (AND) are true.
NOP ; Space
LOAD I6 ; Begin sub-block (OR) OR
AND NOT I7 IF Input 6 AND NOT Input 7
ORB* ; End sub-block (OR) are true.
NOP ; Space
NOP ; Space
OUT O1 ; End instruction block THEN Output1 is ON.
ELSE Output1 is OFF.)
:
:
END 0 ; End PLC Program
Figure 43: Example of a PLC Program and Equivalent PLC

Code
*Note: In the GX Tool an ORB must be declared before defining the

block to be ORd for graphic formatting purposes.

Dial-up Feature IMPORTANT: Before the DX-9100 Controller can be used for dial-in
with an NDM alarm reporting, it must have version 1.2 or 2.1
firmware, and the program must be generated using
the GX-9100 for Windows program. The dial-up
feature is not available with Version 3, the
LONWORKS compatible DX-912x.
There is no special programming or firmware required
to allow the DX-9100 Controller to be used in a dial-
out application where the operator is initiating the
command to dial.
The DX-9100 Controller does not support COS reporting and therefore
does not cause the NDM to automatically dial in. A bit, called the
DIAL bit, was added to the DX-9100 with version 1.2 or 2.1 firmware.
The NDM monitors this bit to determine if an alarm condition has
occurred. Once the DIAL bit is set, the NDM initiates its dial-in
sequence. Special programming, similar to that shown in this
application, is required to set this DIAL bit. The DIAL bit is reset by
the supervisory system once the NDM makes a connection, and the
DX-9100 Controller comes online.
The DX-9100 Controller can be used for a dial-in N2 application if the
following tasks are performed.
1. Determine which points in the DX-9100 Controller (hardware or
software) need to initiate the dial command sequence.
2. Program the DX-9100 such that the points chosen in Step 1
properly set the DIAL bit from within the Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC).
3. Program the NDM as specified in the NDM Configurator
Application Note (MET-CTW-06) under Tab 6 in the
Configuration Tools for Windows Manual (MET-CTW).
For DX controllers, versions 1.4 and 2.3, the dial-up feature is also
used to allow the Metasys supervisory system to read trend log data for
its Point History feature. The logic variable HTRR (Historical Trend
Read Request) indicates when the buffers are full and must be included
in the logic diagram if the trend data is required for Metasys Point
History. Refer also to the section Trend Log further in this document.
Choosing the Because the DIAL bit is set from within the PLC, any digital point,
Points such as a binary input or possibly an analog inputs alarm status, is a
valid choice. It is up to the programmer to decide which of these
points, when added to the PLC, must cause the NDM to dial in and
report the alarm condition. It is crucial that the points that set the
DIAL bit within the PLC also exist as alarm reporting points in the
supervisory system.
The following application shows the configuration needed to add the
points to the PLC to set the DIAL bit.

Configuring the This application requires a dial-in to occur if either sensors, AI1 or
Program AI3, go into a high alarm or return to normal state. In addition, a dial-
in is also required if either digital input, DI1 or DI2, go into an alarm,
or if the trend log buffer is full.
To do this, open a page in the PLC and enter a logic block that ORBs
all the alarm points together and then SETs the DIAL bit as a result.
For the return to normal alarms, it is necessary to add a LOAD NOT of
the alarm condition.
The following diagram is an example of how this configuration appears
in the PLC.
Logic Module Ladder Diagram - PLC1

User Name: DIAL
Description: Dial Control
AIH1 DIAL
L COS SET
AIH1
L COS
AIH3
L COS
AIH3
L COS
DI1
L COS
DI2
L COS
HTRR
DIAGRH1
Figure 44: Configuration Diagram
The COS block is needed to prevent an alarm point from retriggering

the DIAL bit by having a true output for only one pass of the PLC after
it detects a transition from low to high. This requires the alarm point to
return to normal before that COS outputs again.

When an alarm occurs, the DIAL bit is set. The remote NDM then
detects the reset, causing it to dial in to the local NDM. Once
communication is established, the supervisory system resets the dial
bit.
Note: To create the above logic, you must use an ORB rather than an
OR statement. If an OR statement is used, you will not be able
to AND the COS block with the alarm point.
The HTRR variable does not require a COS element as the
Metasys system will always reset HTRR when a connection is
made.
Variations Note that the previous example requires a line of PLC for each
condition that requires a dial-in to occur. In order to conserve space in
the PLC, it is possible to generate the alarms utilizing a timer. The
purpose of the timer is to generate a pulse when the alarm is first
detected, just as the COS block did in the previous example. The timer
outputs (which indicate that an alarm has occurred) can then be used in
the PLC to set the DIAL bit.
To do this, add the conditions that require a dial-in as the inputs to the
timer. Define the timer as a pulse type timer with a time of 2 seconds,
which gives the PLC time to detect the pulse. Use the timer outputs in
the PLC to generate a pulse to an LRS. This same LRS is then used to
set the DIAL bit.
This method conserves space in the PLC by performing the OR
statement of up to seven alarm conditions on one line. This is done
with reverse logic by ANDing a series of LOAD NOTs instead of
ORing a series of LOADs.
This method is shown in the following two diagrams. The first shows
how to configure the timers and the second shows how to use these
timers with reverse logic in the PLC.
TIMER (TIMER 1) - Data

-----------------------
User Name :COS

Description :TIMER USED AS COS BLOCK
TIMER #1 TYPE 1 TIMER #5 TYPE 1

Input Connection #1--> AIH1 Input Connection #5--> DI1
Reset Connection #1--> Reset Connection #5-->
Time Period #1 2.0000 Time Period #5 2.0000
Time Units #1 0 Time Units #5 0
Input Connection #2--> /AIH1 Input Connection #6--> DI2
Input Connection #3--> AIH3 Input Connection #7-->
Input Connection #4--> /AIH3 Input Connection #8-->
Timer Period #4 2.000 Timer Period #8 2.000
TIMER
Figure 45: Timer

Logic Module Ladder Diagram - PLC2
User Name: ALT-DIAL
Description: ALTERNATIVE DIAL METHOD
PM1TD01 PM1TD02 PM1TD03 PM1TD04 PM1TD05 PM1TD06 LRS1
LRS1 DIAL
L SET
HTRR
DIAGPH2
Figure 46: Configuration Diagram Variation
Note: 1. If more than seven alarms are required, another line in the
PLC could be added which would command an additional
LRS. This LRS would then be used in conjunction with the
first LRS to set the DIAL bit.
2. The HTRR bit is only available in the PLC module (under
DIAGNOSTIC) and cannot be used as a source to a
TIMER module.
GX Labels DIAL When set to 1 by a set statement in the PLC, this causes
the N2 Dialer to connect the N2 Bus to a supervisory system
via telephone lines. The DIAL bit will be reset to 0 by the
supervisory system when the telephone line connection is
successful.

Trend Log The Trend Log module provides 12 trend log channels, each recording
(Versions 1.4, data from either one analog item with up to 61 values or from a set of
2.3, 3.3 or later) eight logic variables (logic variable byte) with up to 30 values. When
the trend log buffer for a channel is full, the oldest value is overwritten
by the newest value. The trend can be used to provide data for Metasys
Point History in DX controllers which are remote from the Metasys
system or for a local DX LCD Display. Trend data cannot be displayed
on the integral DX controller display panel, nor on the GX or SX
Tools.
Metasys Point When the DX controller is connected to a Metasys system by an NDM

History (for DX dialer and telephone lines, the trend data may be read whenever a
Versions 1.4 and connection is made by the Metasys system. The data is stored in the
2.3 or later) point history file of AI, AOS and BI objects when they are mapped to
the items being recorded. When the Metasys Point History option is
selected for a trend log channel, only those items which can be mapped
to Metasys objects are allowed and the trend parameters are set by the
GX Tool to recommended default values for the Point History feature
in Metasys. You may change these default values, but you must take
into consideration the maximum number of values that Metasys Point
History can display and the frequency of the connections to the
Metasys system via dial-up. You must link the Historical Trend Read
Request logic variable to the DIAL request logic variable in a PLC
module to initiate a connection when a trend record buffer contains the
maximum number of values that can be displayed by the Metasys Point
History feature. As a DX Version 3.x cannot be connected to a Metasys
system by the NDM dialer and telephone lines, trend logs cannot be
configured for Metasys Point History in these versions.
Trend Log for DX Trend channels which are not used for Metasys Point History are freely
LCD Display (for configurable. For analog items the sampling rate may be entered and
DX Versions 2.3 the stored values may be either the average, maximum or minimum
and 3.3 or later) values during the sampling period, or the instantaneous value at the
time of recording. Logic variables are recorded with a time and date
stamp when there is a change of value. All channels may be displayed
on the DX LCD Display. The display always shows the latest values
recorded, with up to 61 values for an analog item and up to 30 values
for a logic variable.
Note: When selecting a logic variable, choose the byte which contains
the required variable. All variables in the set will be then
available for Metasys Point History or for the DX LCD Display.
Since a logic variable set is recorded when any one of its
variables changes state, you are recommended to reserve some
of the LRS logic variable bytes for trend log and to connect the
source variables (the ones that you wish to trend) to the LRS
variables in a PLC module. This avoids wasting trend buffer
space with records of state changes of logic variables that are
not required for display.

A channel of the trend log is defined by the following parameters:
Table 2: Trend Log Parameters

Parameter Possible Values Default / Metasys Point History
Setting in GX Tool
Source Item or Logic Variable Index (byte) See Appendix 5 None
Sampling Rate 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 Analog (AI): 30 Analog (AOS): 180
(Period of time between records) Multiples of 60 Logic Variables (BI): 1
1440 maximum Note: Logic Variable bytes are read
each second, but only
recorded when there has been
a change of state in at least
one bit.
Sampling Rate Units Sec. (seconds) Analog (AI and AOS): Min.
Min. (minutes)
Read Request Analog: 0 to 61 Analog (AI): 48 Analog (AOS): 10
(Number of new samples to set HTRR) Logic Variables: 0 to 30 Logic Variables (BI): 10
Note: A value of 0 disables the Read Note: When Metasys Point History is
Request feature for the Item or not selected: 0
Logic Variable
Sampling Mode Average Actual
(Analog value to record at end of each Maximum (Not applicable to Logic Variables)
period) Minimum
Actual
Logic Variable
Synchronization None Hour
(Exact time of the start of trend recording) Day (midnight 00:00:00) (Not applicable to Logic Variables)
Hour (xx:00:00)
Minute (xx:xx:00)
Via the GX Tool

Click on PM in the Tool Bar, then select Trend and position the
module on the screen. Double click on the TREND LOG module
block. The Trend Log definition table with 12 rows, one for each
channel, will appear. Highlight the channel, then select Data.
In the dialog box check the Metasys Point History box if required,
then enter the desired Tag Name of the item or logic variable set to be
recorded.
Note: Metasys Point History is not available for DX Version 3.x as
this controller cannot be monitored remotely with an NDM
dialer.
One of two data windows will appear when a valid tag name has been
entered, depending on whether an analog item or logic variable set was
selected.
Refer to Appendix 5 for a list of the tag names available in Trend Log.
Enter the desired values in the data fields.

Note: If Metasys Point History was checked, do not change the
default values unless you have a good understanding of the
Metasys Point History feature. For details, refer to the Point
History Technical Bulletin (Code No. LIT-636112) in the
Feature Software Section of the Metasys Network Technical
Manual (FAN 636).
In any free line of a PLC module add a LOAD element assigned to the
logic variable HTRR (listed under DIAGNOSTIC) followed by a SET
element assigned to the logic variable DIAL. If other logic variables
have already been configured to set the DIAL variable, add the HTRR
variable as an OR element to the ladder logic diagram. Refer to Dial-up
Feature with an NDM - Configuring the Program earlier in this
document for an example.
Via the SX Tool
Trend log cannot be configured with the SX Tool. However, the
following items can be read in the General Module for diagnostic
purposes.
Item DIAG (RI.03)
HTRR Bit X4 = 1 Historical Trend Read Request (one of the
Trend Read Request bits for channels 1 to 12 is
set)
Item TRSTA (RI.47) Trend Status

Bit Xn = 1 Trend Read Request for Channel n (n = 1 to 12)
Item PHMAP (RI.48) Point History Map

Bit Xn = 1 Trend Channel n used for Point History (n = 1
to 12)
Supervisory Versions 1 and 2 of the DX-9100 Controller may be connected to a

Mode Control supervisory system using the RS-485 serial link (N2 Bus or Bus 91).
Settings The Version 3 Controller (DX-912x-8454) is connected to the Metasys
(General NCM-300 via the LONWORKS N2 Bus. Supervisory Mode Control
Module) operates in the same way in all three versions.
Access to the For control access, the supervisory system must first set a Supervisory
Controller System Active bit. To keep control access, the supervisory system
must refresh that bit at a minimum of every 120 minutes. If the
supervisory system fails or loses communication with the controller,
and the bit is not refreshed, the controller returns automatically to its
standalone mode of operation.

When the supervisory system bit is active, the supervisory system has
access to the supervisory parameters of the controller. It can also
change numerical and logic values by addressing the respective Items
in the Item list. Items stored in EEPROM may only be written to on an
occasional basis. (Maximum of once a day.)
The functions specifically related to the supervisory system control are
as follows:
Set a programmable function module, output module, extension
module or time schedule module to Hold Mode.
Set the Shutoff Mode.
Set the Startup Mode.
Set a control module to Computer Mode.
Enable supervisory control of digital outputs (triacs).
Set digital outputs (triacs) to ON or OFF.
Within a control module (PID or ON/OFF), the output may be
overridden by supervisory system control with the following priorities:
1. Hold Mode
2. Shutoff Mode (when enabled)
3. Startup Mode (when enabled)
4. Computer Mode
Via Metasys/Companion
The Supervisory System Active bit is automatically set by Metasys
supervisory systems when connected online.
Via the GX Tool

As the GX Tool has no Supervisory system functions; it is not
necessary to set the Supervisory System Active bit from the GX Tool.
Via the SX Tool

Set the supervisory bit at Bit X16 of Item SUP (RI.01) (General
Module).
Startup Mode The Startup Mode can operate properly only if a PID or ON/OFF
Controller is configured in Programmable Function Module 1.
To allow the Startup Mode to be active in a particular module the
Enable Startup Mode must be set to 1.
This mode is activated and de-activated by a supervisory system. It is
also de-activated after 120 minutes when the communication with the
supervisory system fails.

For PID algorithms, the output will be set to a level between 0 and
100%, overriding the output limits of the control module.
For ON/OFF algorithms, the output will be set to a level of 0 or 1.
The Startup Mode will remain active as long as the controller
configured in the Programmable Function Module 1 has an absolute
deviation greater than 5% of the PV range. A lower deviation will clear
the startup command throughout all enabled modules.
Configure using the reference STUP.
Via the GX Tool

To allow the Startup Mode to be active, select PID or ON/OFF and
then Data to call up the Data Window. Enter a value of 1 in the
Ena. Startup field. (If you do not want it active, enter 0.)
To set the startup commanded value, select ON/OFF or PID, and then
Data to call up the Data Window. Enter the value at the Startup Out
Level field.
Via the SX Tool

Under Program Modules, set the Enable Startup Mode via PM
Item PMnOPT (RI.01) Bit X3 (STAE).
Set the PID startup output at Alg. Item STL (RI.52).
Set ON/OFF startup output at PM Item PMnOPT (RI.01) Bit X4
(STAL).
Activate or de-activate under General Module, by setting Bit X8 of
Item SUP (RI.01) (STUP).
The status of the mode can be seen under Program Modules at PM
Item PMnST (RI.72) Bit X10 (STA).
Shutoff Mode This mode is activated and deactivated by a supervisory system. It is

also deactivated after 120 minutes when the communication with the
supervisory system fails.
For PID algorithms, the output will be set to a level between 0 and
100%, overriding the output limits of the control module. For ON/OFF
algorithms, the output will be set to a level of 0 or 1.
To allow the Shutoff Mode to be active in a particular module the
Enable Shutoff Mode must be set to 1.
In PID algorithms, if Shutoff to OFF change is set at 1 the Shutoff
Mode is changed to the OFF Mode if PV < WSP (OFF Mode) in a
heating controller (PB is negative), and if PV > WSP (OFF Mode) in a
cooling controller (PB is positive).

In Shutoff Mode, the control module will assume a configured output
value of between 0 and 100%, overriding the output limits of the
control module.
Configure using the reference SOFF.
Via the GX Tool

To allow the Shutoff Mode to be active, select PID or ON/OFF
module, and then Data to call up the Data Window. Enter the value 1
in the Ena. Shutoff field. If you do not want the Shutoff Mode to be
active, leave it at 0.
To set the output value, select ON/OFF or PID, and then Data to call
up the Data Window. Enter the value at the Shutoff Out Level field.
For a Shutoff to OFF change, as described above, enter a 1 at Ena
OFF Trans: .
Via the SX Tool

Under Program Modules, set the Enable Shutoff Mode via PM
Item PMnOPT (RI.01) Bit X1 (SOFE).
Set the PID output value under Program Modules at Alg. Item SOL
(RI.51).
Set the ON/OFF output value at PM Item PMnOPT (RI.01) Bit X2
(SOFL).
Activate and de-activate this mode under General Module by setting
Bit X7 of Item SUP (RI.01) (SOFF).
Set Shutoff to OFF change under Program Modules at PM Item
PMnOPT (RI.01) Bit X9 (SOTO).
The status of the mode can be seen under Program Modules at PM
Item PMnST (RI.72) Bit X9 (SOF).
Hold Mode Each programmable function module, output module, time schedule
module, or extension module can be commanded to operate in Hold
Mode by the supervisory system. It will remain active until the hold
command is changed. Hold Mode is not interrupted when the serial
communication link fails. Overriding from the DX front panel (using
the A/M key), also puts certain output and programmable modules in
Hold Mode.
In Hold Mode, the output of the module is not updated by the Control
algorithm and can be directly controlled by the supervisory system.
Refer also to Power Up Conditions - Hold Mode below.

Hold modes are automatically set when overriding the output value of a
programmable module, output module, or extension module.
Via the GX Tool

Modules cannot be put in Hold Mode directly by the GX Tool. Hold
modes may, however, be set and reset by the PLC, or on power-up.
Refer to Programmable Logic Controller Configuration - PLC User-
Defined Program, and Power Up Conditions - Hold Mode in this
manual.
Via the SX Tool

For each programmable function module, the control and status of
Hold modes is available under Program Modules at PM Item
PMnHDC (RI.70) Bits X1-X8.
For time schedule modules, the control of Hold Mode is available
under Time Sched TSnSTA (RI.06) Bit X1 (TSnHLD).
For analog output modules, the control of Hold Mode is available
under Output Modules at Item AOC (RI.07) Bit X1 (OUH).
For digital output modules, the control of Hold Mode is available under
Output Modules at Item DOC (RI.12) Bit X1 (OUH).
For extension module outputs, the control of Hold Mode is available
under XT Modules at Item XTnHDC (RI.69) Bits X1-X8 (OUH1-8).
Computer Mode Each PID or ON/OFF controller can be commanded to operate in

Computer Mode by a supervisory system. It will remain active until the
supervisory system changes the mode, or communication is lost for
120 minutes. In Computer Mode the calculation of the WSP of a PID
or ON/OFF controller is no longer performed within the controller, and
the supervisory system must continuously set the value of WSP. It is
not possible to change the WSP from the DX front panel when
Computer Mode is active.
In the DX-9100 controllers, versions 1 and 2 (firmware Version 1.1 or

later), the Computer Mode will also be inactive during any period of
serial link communication failure. This does not apply to the DX-912x
Controller, Version 3. See Serial Link Monitoring further in this
document.
The Computer Mode is automatically set when overriding a Working
Setpoint Value (WSP) in a programmable control module.

Via the GX Tool
Modules cannot be put in Computer Mode directly by the GX Tool.
Computer modes may, however, be set and reset by the PLC. Refer to
Programmable Logic Controller Configuration - PLC User-Defined
Program in this manual.
Via the SX Tool

For each programmable function module configured as PID or
ON/OFF controller; under Program Modules, set PM Item
PMnHDC (RI.70) Bit X2, then adjust WSP (RI.61).
Controlling The supervisory system can control the status of the digital outputs to
Digital Outputs ON or OFF by directly overriding the triacs.
Via the GX Tool

The override of digital outputs cannot be controlled directly by the GX
Tool.
Note: supervisory system commands to digital outputs do not pass
through the Digital Output Modules, and therefore the DX front
panel display does not follow the status of the output triac when
supervisory control is enabled. See the figure below:
Digital Output
Configuration Control Output Hardware
(DO Source Connection) Module (Triac)
dxcgdo1
Front Panel Supervisory

Display and System
Control Override
Figure 47: Controlling Digital Outputs by Supervisory System

Override
For ON/OFF type digital outputs, it is possible to display the true status
of the digital output when under supervisory system override control by
connecting the status of the digital output hardware (triac) to the source
connection of the digital output module via PLC logic. An example is
shown in the figure below. When the digital output override is enabled
by the supervisory system the output module is controlled by the status
of the hardware, and when the digital output override is not enabled the
output module is controlled by the configured source.

DOn DOnE LRSn
DOnE
DO Source
DOn Status
Digital Output
PLC LRSn Output Hardware
Logic
Module (Triac)
dxcgdo2
Figure 48: Display of True Digital Output Status on DX Front

Panel When Under Supervisory System Override Control
Via the SX Tool

First, the SX may enable control of the six digital (triac) outputs of the
controller by setting bits X9 to X14 of Item SUP (RI.01) under General
Module.
Control the triacs ON or OFF by setting Bits X1 to X6 of Item SUP
(RI.01) (under General Modules) to 1 or 0, respectively.
The status of the triacs can be seen under General Modules at Item
TOS (RI.05) X1=D03...X6=D08.
Maintenance When any parameter is changed in the controller, Maintenance Started

Control (under General Module, Bit X1 of Item MNT (RI.02)) will be set as
the change is started and Maintenance Stopped, Bit X2 of Item MNT
(RI.02), will be set as the change is completed. Changes can be made
from the front panel, a service module, or the DX LCD Display. These
bits can only be reset by a command from supervisory systems and are
used to alert a remote operator that changes have been made.
Via Metasys
Configure using the reference MNT. (Not available on Companion.)
Via GX Tool (Versions 1.4, 2.3, 3.3 or later)
In the PLC, the MNT variable is listed under DIAGNOSTIC and
represents Maintenance Stopped.
Via SX Tool
The logic variables may be seen under General Module as follows:
Item MNT (RI.02) X1 = 1 Maintenance Started
X2 = 1 Maintenance Stopped

Counter Size Four bytes have been allocated for counter data in the controller and a
value of up to 9,999,999 can be displayed on the front panel of the
controller. Certain supervisory systems (Metasys, for example,) only
read the least significant 15 bits and provide extensive facilities to store
counter data in computer memory, or on diskette or tape. To enable the
synchronization of the DX-9100 display panel with supervisory
systems, the reset of counter values can be configured as follows:
Via the GX Tool

Select Edit-Global Data. Under Counter Type, mark the 15 bit
(Metasys) or 4 byte field.
Via the SX Tool

Under General Module, Item DXS1 (RI.32), set Bit X4 as follows:
X4 = 0 Select 15 bit counters
(Counter resets at 32,767)
X4 = 1 Select 4 byte counters
(Counter resets at 9,999,999)
Serial Link There are two logic variables available in the Version 1 or 2 controller
Monitoring which indicate the status of the supervisory system and the serial link.
They may be used in the PLC to enable standalone control sequencers
or local time schedules, for example. Only the logic variable SSA is
available in the Version 3 controller.
The logic variable SSA (Supervisory System Active) is set by the
supervisory system to enable the supervisory functions of the
controller. This logic variable must be set by the supervisory system at
least every two hours as the controller will automatically reset the bit
120 minutes after the last update. The SSA bit indicates that the
supervisory system has been active within the last two hours, or that the
supervisory system has not been active for a period of more than two
hours. When the SSA bit is not set, the following supervisory system
control modes are automatically cancelled:
Shutoff Mode Computer Mode
Startup Mode Digital Outputs Enable and Command
The logic variable SLF (Serial Link Failure) (not available in the
Version 3 controller) indicates the status of the serial link
independently of any supervisory system functions. In a Version 1 or 2
controller, the bit is reset when the N2 Bus serial link communications
are good, and set when the N2 Bus serial link communications have
been absent or unreadable for a period of more than one minute.

In a DX-912x (Firmware Version 3), the SLF bit is not used and is
always reset.
When the SLF bit is set, the following Supervisory System Control
Mode is not active:
Computer Mode (Firmware Version 1.1 or later)
Via GX Tool
In the PLC the SSA variable is listed under SUPERV and the SLF
variable is listed under DIAGNOSTIC.
Note: DIAGNOSTIC will be available in GX Tool versions later
than 3.0.
Via SX Tool
The logic variables may be seen in the General Module as follows:
Item SUP (RI.01)
X16 = 0 SSA Supervisory System Not Active (after two hours)
X16 = 1 Supervisory System Active
Item DIAG (RI.03)
X5 = 0 SLF Serial Link OK
X5 = 1 Serial Link Failure (after one minute)
GX Labels Points for PLC

DOnC A 1 when the supervisory system has commanded the
digital output to be ON.
DOnE A 1 when the supervisory system has taken control of
the digital output.
MNT A 1 when an item has been change from the front
panel, service module or DX LCD display.
SLF Serial Link Failure. Set to 1 60 seconds after the last
message from the supervisory system.
SOFF A 1 when the supervisory system has commanded the
Shutoff Mode.
SSA A 1 when the supervisory system is active, and returns
to 0 two hours after the last command from the
supervisory system.
STUP A 1 when the supervisory system has commanded the
Startup Mode.

Controller There are four logic variables available in the controller to provide
Diagnostics diagnostic information. The first is the serial link failure condition
(SLF) described above. The second indicates when the internal lithium
battery has discharged to approximately 20% of its initial capacity
(BATLOW). The third indicates that a trend log buffer has reached its
read request limit (HTRR) as described under Trend Log. The fourth is
the Maintenance Control item described above.
Via GX Tool
In the PLC the SLF, BATLOW, HTRR, and MNT variables are listed
under DIAGNOSTIC.
Note: DIAGNOSTIC will be available in the GX Tool versions later
than 3.0
Via SX Tool
The logic variables may be seen in the General Module under Item
DIAG (RI.03):
X2 = 0 BATLOW lithium battery OK.
X2 = 1 BATLOW lithium battery low charge
X4 = 1 HTRR one or more trend log buffers are full
X5 = 0 SLF serial link OK
X5 = 1 SLF serial link failure (after one minute)
The MNT variable may be seen in the General Module under item
MNT (RI.02).
GX Labels
BATLOW A 1 when the DX lithium battery needs to be replaced.
HTRR A 1 when one or more trend log buffers are full.
MNT A 1 when an item has been change from the front
panel, service module or DX LCD display.
Power Up When the controller is powered up after a 24 VAC power interruption,

Conditions various operating modes can be set or reset to allow a predetermined
startup sequence of control operations.
Hold Mode At power up output modules can be set to Hold Mode, reset from Hold
Mode (set to 0) or may retain the last mode before power failure.
These commands take priority over the supervisory mode command
initialization described in the next section, Supervisory Mode
Commands Initialization.

Via the GX Tool
For analog outputs, select AOn and then Data to call up the Data
Window. For digital outputs, select DOn and then Data to call up the
Data Window (only for PAT or DAT modules).
Note: The Hold Mode for DO ON/OFF, PULSE or STA/STO
modules can only be configured via the SX Tool.
At the Hold on Powerup (0=N) field, when 1 is entered, the
module will be put in hold on power up. The Hold Mode can be
released back to auto control from a supervisory system, the SX, the
PLC, or via the DX front panel.
At the Auto on Powerup (0=N) field, when 1 is entered, the
module will release this modules Hold Mode on power up.
If both are 1, then the Hold setting takes precedence.
If both are 0 the Hold Mode status will not be changed on Power Up
(it will remain in the same state as prior to the power failure), unless
the Init. On PowerUp has been set as described under Supervisory
Mode Commands Initialization below.
Via the SX Tool
Table 3: Configuration Bits for Hold Mode Power Up Control

Module Configuration Bits
Analog Output Modules (RI.00) (AOTn, X7, X8) Under Output Modules.
Digital Output Modules (RI.00) (DOTn, X7, X8) Under Output Modules.
The desired settings are made in the Item and bits shown above.
(See the DX-9100 Type Settings section in the beginning
of this document.)
Bit X8 = 1 The Hold Mode is set at power up to the status set in Bit
X7.
Bit X7 = 0 The Hold Mode is set to hold at power up if Bit X8 is set.
Bit X7 = 1 The Hold Mode is reset (set to 0) at power up if Bit X8
is set.
Supervisory The supervisory system control settings can be programmed to remain
Mode Commands set after a power failure or to be initialized to OFF after a power
Initialization failure.
The Hold on Power Up and Auto on Power Up take priority for
AO, DAT, and PAT modules over the Init. on Power Up command.

Via the GX Tool
Select Edit-Global Data. Under Init. On PowerUp, select
maintained or cancelled.
maintained = retain supervisory system commands
cancelled = release supervisory system commands
Via the SX Tool

Under General Module DX-9100 Type Settings, set Bit X8 of Item
DXS1 (RI.32) as follows:
X8 = 0 No initialization on power up
X8 = 1 Initialize on power up
Programmable At power up the PLC always runs from the first instruction in the
Logic Controller program. Special power up routines should therefore be configured at
(PLC) the beginning of the program. These routines will not be executed in
subsequent program cycles when the address of the first non-power
up instruction is entered in the END instruction. In the GX-9100 Tool
the location of the first non-power up instruction is marked by the
RSR element in the ladder diagram.
Power up routines may be used, for example, to set or reset Hold
modes based upon prevailing conditions at the time of power up, or to
set timers to provide a sequential startup of equipment or to prevent the
startup of equipment until building conditions have stabilized after the
return of power. Refer to the Programmable Logic Control
Configuration section of this document, as well as to Programmable
Logic Control section in the DX-9100 Extended Digital Controller
Technical Bulletin.
Download/
Upload
Download via the Via the GX Tool
N2 Bus (Versions
1 and 2 Only) Connect an RS-232-C/RS-485 converter (type MM-CVT101-x in
North America and type IU-9100-810x in Europe) to one of the serial
communication ports (COM1 or COM2) of the personal computer on
which the GX Tool is running. Connect the N2 Bus of the DX-9100 to
the converter unit connected to the PC.
Set the address switches and jumpers on the DX-9100 and
XT/XTM/XP devices (if used) as required, and connect the
XT/XTM/XP devices to the XT Bus of the DX-9100. (See the
DX-9100, XT-9100, and XTM-905 technical bulletins for details.)
If the DX-9100 (and XT/XTM/XP devices) are installed and wired,
verify all field wiring and sensor voltage/current signals. It is
recommended that controlled devices be isolated during download and
initial startup.

Note: Do not download an untested configuration into an installed
device. Test the configuration on a simulator panel before
downloading.
Apply 24 VAC power to the DX-9100 and the XT/XTM/XP devices, if
connected.
On the GX Tool, with the needed configuration on screen, select
Action - Download, and then the Item to be downloaded, as in the
table below.
Table 4: Downloading, Versions 1 and 2

DX and XT/XTM Downloads complete configuration to DX and all configured
XT/XTMs (all configured XT/XTMs must be online).
Note: This option must be selected when downloading a DX with
XT//XTMs for the first time.
DX Downloads all configuration information required by DX (all
configured XT/XTMs must be online, but XT/XTM information is not
downloaded).
XT/XTM Downloads all configuration information required by XT/XTM
(excludes DX information).
Calibration Downloads calibration information only.
Note: Ensure that the correct calibration infomation for the connected
controller is contained in the configuration on screen.
Time Downloads the current PC clock time.
Enter the DX-9100 address (0-255) in the Address field. Under

Port, select the PC serial communication port (Com 1 or 2).
DX Version 1.4, 2.3, 3.3 or later: Enter the password code if the
configuration in the controller has been protected by a password.
Click on OK to confirm entries.
Checks are made before the data is downloaded to the controller. The
user may abort the download process by selecting CANCEL.
Download via Via the GX Tool

RS-232-C Port
Connect the serial communication port of the PC directly to the
(Versions 2 and 3
Only)
RS-232-C port of the DX-9100 Controller. See DX-9100 Extended
Digital Controller Technical Bulletin for details. Proceed as above in
the Download via the N2 Bus section.
Version 3 Only
Select the Item to be downloaded, as in the table below.

Table 5: Downloading, Version 3
DX, XT/XTM, Downloads complete configuration to DX, including LONWORKS
Network Network input/output information, and to all configured XT/XTMs (all
configured XT/XTMs must be online).
Note: This option must be selected when downloading a Version 3
DX with or without XT/XTMs for the first time.
DX Downloads all configuration information required by DX, excluding
LONWORKS Network input/output information, and XT/XTM
information.
XT/XTM Downloads all configuration information required by XT/XTM
(excludes DX information).
Network Downloads LONWORKS Network input/output information only.
Calibration Downloads calibration information only.
Note: Ensure that the correct calibration infomation for the connected
controller is contained in the configuration on screen.
Time Downloads the current PC clock time.
Upload via the N2 Via the GX Tool

Bus or RS-232-C
Only complete DX-9100/XT-9100/XTM-905 configurations should be
Port
uploaded from the DX-9100. Select Action - Upload, and then the
Item to be uploaded, for example, DX and XT/XTM. Enter the
DX-9100 address (0-255) in the Address field. Under Port, select
the PC serial communication port (Com 1 or 2).
DX Version 1.4, 2.3, 3.3 or later: Enter the password code if the
configuration in the controller has been protected by a password.
Click on OK to confirm entries.
If the configuration in the controller matches that on the GX Tool
screen, the parameters will be uploaded from the controller and replace
those in the GX Tool configuration. If the configuration does not match
that on the GX Tool screen, the user will be prompted to save the
displayed GX Tool configuration and save the uploaded configuration
to another file.
Via the SX Tool

The configuration entered into the DX-9100 Controller may be stored
in the service module as an ALGORITHM for transfer to another
controller when not protected by a password.
Refer to the SX-9120 Service Module Users Guide for further details.

Calibration Each DX-9100 Controller has a set of unique calibration values, which
Values are set in the factory before delivery. These calibration values are
stored in EEPROM and it will not normally be necessary to change or
reenter these values during the life of the controller. If the user wishes
to secure the calibration data on diskette, the calibration values may be
uploaded and downloaded using the GX Tool.
If it becomes necessary to recalibrate the inputs and outputs of a
controller, this can be done using the SX Tool. See the SX-9120
Service Module Users Guide.
Via the GX Tool

Connect the DX-9100 Controller to the PC as described under
Download/Upload.
To upload the calibration values, on the GX Tool select File, then New
to clear the PC screen. Select Action then Upload. Select Calibration
and PC Port (1 or 2). Enter the DX-9100 Controller address (0-255).
Press <Enter>. When the upload is complete, press <Enter>, reselect
File and then Save. Save the uploaded calibration values in a file
unique for this controller.
To download calibration values, select File and then Open. Open the
file with the calibration values unique to this controller. Select Action
and Download. Select Calibration and PC Port (1 or 2). Enter the
DX-9100 Controller address (0-255). Press <Enter>.
For more details, refer to the GX-9100 Software Configuration Tool for
Windows Users Guide (MET-CTW-05) under Tab 5 in the
Configuration Tools for Windows Manual (MET-CTW).

Appendix 1: SX Tool Item
Description and Tables
Description of
Items
Item Address A configuration is comprised of a set of parameters stored in a series of
memory locations in the controller. These parameters are called
items. Each item is assigned an Item Address.
Active parameters such as counter values are stored in RAM, and
configuration parameters are stored in EEPROM. Data stored in
EEPROM type memory is retained even when no battery power is
available.
A memory area with a certain range of item addresses for its
parameters or items has been assigned to each module.
Each item within this range has been assigned a Relative Item (RI.)
address from which its absolute address can be determined. The
absolute address of an item is the sum of the starting address of the
module range and the relative item address.
Note: When using the GX Tool for the DX-9100, the user refers only
to module and item tags. Absolute and relative addresses are
used in the SX Tool.
Item Type The information stored in the items can have one of several formats:
Floating Point Numerical Items are real numbers, with a +/- sign. They
refer to input or output values, setpoint values, proportional band
values, limit values, etc. They are displayed and entered as numbers,
with a sign and a decimal point. These items are shown in the Item List
with Number in the Type column.
Integer Items are positive whole numbers used as scale factors. These
items are shown in the All Item List with 1 Byte Int or 2 Byte Int in
the Type column.
Totalized Numerical Items are real positive numbers. They refer to
totalized values such as pulse counters and accumulators. They are
displayed and entered as whole numbers, without sign and decimal
point. These items are shown in the Item List with 4 Bytes in the
Type column.
Software Connections show to which item or logic variable address the
item is connected. This information is entered as numbers representing
the address of the connected item or the index and bit position of a
logic variable. A 0 de-selects the connection. These items are shown
in the Item List with Connection in the Type column.

Destinations are 2-byte items which show the destination address and
type of network analog and digital outputs. A 0 represents no
destination. These items are shown in the Item List with Destination
in the Type column.
Status Items are either 1-byte or 2-byte items giving information on the
actual status or configuration of the modules (Control, Logic,
Calculation, Input or Output), where each bit has a specific meaning as
described in the Item List. These items are shown in the Item List with
the number of bytes in the Type column. Data is displayed and
entered as bytes. In the list the bytes are represented using X1-X8 or
X1-X16:
1 Byte = X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
2 Bytes = X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
Read/Write Data The items shown in the Item List can be divided into three basic
categories:
Input values and status of the controller that can be read but not
changed by a Supervisory System. These items are shown in the
Item List with an R in the R/W (Read/Write) column.
Variables in the controller that can be read and modified by the
SX-9100 Service Module, GX-9100 Graphic Configuration
Software, or Supervisory System. These items are shown on the
Item List with an R/W in the R/W (Read/Write) column. (E)
indicates that the item is stored in EEPROM.
All other items in the DX-9100 refer to configuration parameters
of the controller and contain information such as analog ranges,
module type, connections, etc., and they can only be changed using
the SX-9120 Service Module or the GX-9100 Graphic
Configuration Software Tool. These items are shown in the Item
List with a CNF in the R/W (Read/Write) column.
Item List Each constant, variable, or value inside a DX-9100 Controller can be
addressed through an item code; the Item List describes all the possible
items.
Symbols Symbols used in the Item List:
RI. Relative Item Index from the beginning of the module
Type Item Type
R/W Read/Write Conditions R Read Only Item
R/W Read/Write Item
R/W(E) Read/Write Item (EEPROM)
CNF Configuration Item (EEPROM)
Tag Label for General item or bit within an item
PM Tag Generic Label for Programmable Function Module Item or bit within an item
Alg. Tag Configured Label for Programmable Function Module Item or bit within an
item

Item Type The format of any DX-9100 item is described by the following types:
Number: Floating point number (2 bytes)
1 Byte: Unsigned 8-bit hexadecimal number used to transfer logic
states or integer numbers 0-255.
2 Bytes: Unsigned 16-bit hexadecimal number used to transfer
logic states or unsigned integer numbers 0-65535.
4 Byte: Unsigned 32-bit hexadecimal number used to transfer
unsigned integer numbers (counters and accumulators).
Connection: Module input software connection (2 bytes).
The numeric or logic variable used as a source (input) for a
configurable module is defined via a word with the following format:
For a Logic Connection:
X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X8 ... X1 Index of Source as in Variable List (Hex.)
X11 X10 X9 Bit Position (0-7)
X12 = 0
X13 = 0
X14 = 0
X15 = 1 Logic Connection
X16 = 1 Reverse Variable Value
For an Analog Connection:

X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X12 ... X1 Item Address of Source as Listed In Items List
X15 = 0 Analog Connection
X16 = 1 Negate Variable Value
A 0 represents no connection.
Destination (2 Bytes)
The destination address for network outputs is defined via a word with
the following format:
For a Network Digital Output Destination:
X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X8 ... X1 Destination Controller Address (1-255)
X13 ... X9 Destination Input Number (1-8)
X15 X14 = 01 System 91 Device
X16 = 1 Digital Output

For a Network Analog Output Destination:
X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X8 ... X1 Destination Controller Address (1-255)
X13 ... X9 Destination Input Number (1-16)
X15 X14 = 01 System 91 Device
X16 = 0 Analog Output
A 0 represents no destination.
Floating Point A DX-9100 floating point number consists of two bytes with following
Numbers format:
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
E3 E2 E1 E0 S M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
where: EEEE = 4-bit exponent

S = sign (1=negative)
MMMMMMMMMMM = 11-bit mantissa
A number is normalized when the most significant bit is true

(M10 = 1).
A number is zero when all bits of the mantissa are 0.
The value of a number is:
<NUMBER> = <SIGN> * .<MANTISSA> * 2 exp
<EXPONENT>
Examples:
1 = 1400H or B001H
-1 = 1C00H or B801H
100 = 7640H or B064H
EEPROM Items When writing items from a Supervisory System, it is important to note
that EEPROM items can only be written approximately 10,000 times,
so that cyclical processes in the Supervisory System which result in a
write command must be avoided.

Appendix 2: Item Structure
General Module First Decimal Module Name

0000H 0000 General Control Module
Items Structure
RI. Type R/W Tag Description

00 1 Byte R UNIT Device Model: Version 1.x 05H
Version 2.x 15H
Version 3.x 25H
01 2 Bytes R/W SUP Supervisory Central Control
X16 0 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 DO3C Set Output 3 On
X7 = 1 SOFF Shutoff Mode Command
(SOFC)
X8 = 1 STUP Startup Mode Command
(STAC)
X9 = 1 DO3E Enable Output 3 Supervisory Control
X15 = DIAL Dial-Up Flag
X16 = 1 SSA Supervisory System Active
02 1 Byte R/W MNT Maintenance Control
0 0 0 0 0 0 X2 X1
X1 = 1 Maintenance Started
X2 = 1 Maintenance Stopped
03 2 Byte R DIAG Diagnostics

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 EEPROM EEPROM Failure (Version 2.0 or later)
X2 = 1 BATLOW Battery Backup Low
X3 = 1 EPROM EPROM Checksum Failure
X4 = 1 HTRR Historical Trend Read Request
(Versions 1.4, 2.3 or later)
X5 = 1 SLF Serial Link Failure (not active and
Computer Mode disabled)
X6 = 1 DWNLD Download Mode is active
X7 = 1 DEVRST Device reset has occurred
X8 = 1 PASS Password protection is active
Continued on next page . . .

04 1 Byte R DICT Digital Input Counters
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 DIC1 Count Transition on DI1
05 1 Byte R TOS TRIAC Output Status

X8 0 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 DO3 Output 3 is On
X8 = 1 XTERR Failure in any connected XT/XTM
(Only versions 1.5, 2.5, 3.5 or later)
06 1 Byte R DIS Digital Input Status

X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 DI1 Digital Input 1 is On

07 2 Byte R AIS Analog Input Status
X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 AIH1 High Alarm Condition
X2 = 1 AIL1 Low Alarm Condition
08 2 Byte R LRST1 Logic Results

X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 LRS1 Logic Result Status 1 is On
09 2 Byte R LRST2 Logic Results

X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
LRS17 - Logic Result Status 17-32
LRS32

10 2 Byte R/W LCOS1 Logic Constants
X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 DCO1 Digital Constant 1 is On
11 2 Byte R/W LCOS2 Logic Constants

X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
DCO17 - Digital Constant 17-32
DCO32

12 2 Byte Int R VER Version Level of Firmware
13 4 Bytes R/W CNTR1 DI1 Pulse Count
21 2 Bytes CNF spare
22 1 Byte Int CNF PC1 Prescaler DI1 Counter
30 1 Byte CNF spare
31 Connection CNF ALD@ Alarm Disable Condition Source
32 1 Byte CNF DXS1 DX9100 Type Settings

X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 0 0 0
X4 = 0 15-bit Counters
X4 = 1 4-byte Counters
X6 X5 Extension Bus Timing
= 00 XT-9100 Default
= 01 XTM-905 Default
=10 200 msec
=11 300 msec
X7 = 0 50 Hz Power Line
X7 = 1 60 Hz Power Line
X8 = 1 Initialize on Power Up
33 2 Byte Int CNF ALG Algorithm (Configuration) Number
34 Number R/W ACO1 Analog Constant 1


42 1 Byte R/W PLCNT PLC Control and Status
X8 X7 0 0 0 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 Set Hold Mode
X2 = 1 Set Single-step Mode
X3 = 1 Execute One PLC Step
X7 = 1 Program Error
X8 = 1 PLC Partial Result
43 2 Bytes R PLCPC PLC Program Counter

44 2 Bytes R/W LRST3 Logic Results (Version 1.1 or later)
X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
LRS48
45 2 Bytes R/W LRST4 Logic Results (Version 1.1 or later)

X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
LRS64
Versions 1.4, 2.3, 3.3 or later:

46 2 Bytes R/W DXS2 DX-9100 Type Settings (not used)
47 2 Bytes R TRSTA Trend Status

0 0 0 0 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 Trend Read Request 1

Versions 1.4, 2.3, 3.3 or later:
48 2 Bytes R/W PHMAP Point History Map (Metasys)
0 0 0 0 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 Trend 1 used for Point History

Programmable First Decimal Module Name
0040H 0064 Programmable Function Module 01
Function
00A0H 0160 Programmable Function Module 02
Module Items
Structure
01C0H 0448 Programmable Function Module 05
02E0H 0736 Programmable Function Module 08
03A0H 0928 Programmable Function Module 10
Note: TAG PMnTYP is programmable function module type of

Module n.

00 1 Byte CNF PMnTYP Programmable Function Module Type
01 2 Bytes CNF PMnOPT Programmable Function Module Options
02 1 Byte CNF PMnF1 Function Channel 1 - F1

10 Connection CNF PMnI1@ Input Connection - I@1


26 Number R/W (E) PMnK1 Module Constant - K1




60 Number R/W PMnOU1 Output - Channel 1
68 Number R PMnAX1 Auxiliary Output 1

69 Number R PMnAX2 Auxiliary Output 2
70 1 Byte R/W PMnHDC Hold Mode Control/Status

X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 Hold Channel 1
71 1 Byte R/W PMnDO Logic Outputs Control and Status

X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 DO Channel 1 is On
72 2 Bytes R PMnST Programmable Function Module

Status
X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
73 4 Bytes R/W PMnAC1 Accumulator 1


Analog Input First Decimal Module Name
04C0H 1216 Analog Input Module 1
Module Items
04D0H 1232 Analog Input Module 2
Structure 04E0H 1248 Analog Input Module 3
04F0H 1264 Analog Input Module 4
0500H 1280 Analog Input Module 5
Note: TAG AITn is Analog Input Type of Module n.

00 2 Bytes CNF AITn Analog Input Type
0 0 0 0 0 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X4 X3 X2 X1 Unit of Measure
= 0000 No Units
= 0001 Celsius
= 0010 Fahrenheit
= 0011 Percent
X5 = 1 Enable Square Root of Input
X6 = 1 Alarm on Unfiltered Value
X7 = 0 0...10 Volts
X7 = 1 0...2 Volts or 0...20 mA or RTD
X8 = 1 20 % Suppression
X11 X10 X9 Linearization and Sensor Type
= 000 Active Sensor (Linear)
= 001 Nickel 1000 (JCI)
= 010 Nickel 1000 Extended Range
= 011 A99 Sensor
= 100 PT1000 Sensor (DIN)
= 101 Nickel 1000 L&G (Version 1.1 or
later)
= 110 Nickel 1000 DIN (Version 1.1 or later)
01 Number CNF HRn High Range Input

02 Number CNF LRn Low Range Input
03 Number R/W (E) HIAn High Alarm Limit
04 Number R/W(E) LOAn Low Alarm Limit
05 Number CNF FTCn Filter Constant
06 Number R/W (E) ADFn Differential on Alarm Limit [units]
07 Number R AIn Analog Input Value
08 Number R AI%n Analog Input Value in % of Range
09 2 Bytes R ADCn Analog Input in Counts
10 1 Byte R AISTn Analog Input Status

0 0 0 0 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 AIHn High Alarm Condition
X2 = 1 AILn Low Alarm Condition
X3 = 1 OVRn Overrange Condition
X4 = 1 UNRn Underrange Condition

Analog Output First Decimal Module Name
0540H 1344 Analog Output Module 1
Module Items
Structure
Version 2.0 or later:
Note: TAG AOTn is Analog Output Type of Module n.

00 1 Byte CNF AOTn Analog Output Type
X8 X7 0 0 0 0 X2 X1
X2 X1 Output Signal
= 00 Output Disabled
= 01 Output 0 to 10 V
= 10 Output 0 to 20 mA
= 11 Output 4 to 20 mA
Note: 20 mA outputs not available on
Output Modules 11-14.
X7 = 0 Set Hold at Power Up
X7 = 1 Set Auto at Power Up
X8 = 1 Enable Hold/Auto Set at Power Up
01 Connection CNF AO@n Source of Analog Output Module

(analog)
02 Connection CNF AOF@n Output Forcing Logic Connection
03 Number CNF HROn Output High Range

04 Number CNF LROn Output Low Range
05 Number CNF OFLn Output % Value in Forcing Mode
06 Number R/W OUTn Output Module Output Value %
07 1 Byte R/W AOCn Analog Output Control and Status

0 0 X6 0 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 R/W OUHn Output in Hold Mode
X2 = 1 R AOHn Output at High Limit ... 100%
X3 = 1 R AOLn Output at Low Limit ... 0%
X4 = 1 R AOFn Output is Forced
X6 = 1 R OULn Logic Control Lock
(INC@ = 1, DEC@ = 1)
08 Number CNF HLOn High Limit on Output %
09 Number CNF LLOn Low Limit on Output %
10 Connection CNF INC@n Source of Increase Signal (logic)
11 Connection CNF DEC@n Source of Decrease Signal (logic)
12 Connection CNF ENL@n Enable Limits on Output

Digital Output First Decimal Module Name
0560H 1376 Digital Output Module 3 (DO3)
Module Items
Structure
05A0H 1440 Digital Output Module 7 (DO7)
05B0H 1456 Digital Output Module 8 (DO8)
Note: TAG DOTn is Digital Output Type of Module n.

00 1 Byte CNF DOTn Digital Output Type
X8 X7 0 0 0 X3 X2 X1
X3 X2 X1 Digital Output Mode
= 000 Output Disabled or Paired
= 001 ON/OFF - Logic Source
= 010 ON/OFF - Numeric Source
= 011 DAT Output Type
= 100 PAT without Feedback
= 101 PAT with Feedback
= 110 START/STOP
= 111 PULSE TYPE
X7 = 0 Set Hold at Power Up
X7 = 1 Set Auto at Power Up
X8 = 1 Enable Hold/Auto Set at Power Up
01 Connection CNF DO@n Source of DO Module (ana. or dig.)

02 Connection CNF FB@n Source of Feedback Signal
03 Connection CNF DOF@n Output Forcing Logic Connection
04 Number CNF HROn Output High Range

05 Number CNF LROn Output Low Range
06 Number CNF FSTn PAT Output Full Stroke Time/DAT
Cycle
07 Number CNF DBn PAT Deadband/DAT Min. ON/OFF
08 Number CNF HLOn High Limit on Output %
09 Number CNF LLOn Low Limit on Output %
10 Number CNF OFLn Output % Value in Forcing Mode
11 Number R/W OUTn Output Module Output Value %

12 1 Byte R/W DOCn Digital Output Control and Status
0 0 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 R/W OUHn Output in Hold Mode
X2 = 1 R DOHn Output at High Limit ... 100%
X3 = 1 R DOLn Output at Low Limit ... 0%
X4 = 1 R DOF Output is Forced
X5 = 1 R AFBn Incorrect Feedback
X6 = 1 R OULn Logic Control Lock
(INC@ = 1, DEC@ = 1)
13 Connection CNF INC@n Source of Increase Signal (logic)
14 Connection CNF DEC@n Source of Decrease Signal (logic)
15 Connection CNF ENL@n Enable Limits on Output
Extension First Decimal Module Name

05C0H 1472 Extension Module 1
Module Items
0610H 1552 Extension Module 2
Structure
06B0H 1712 Extension Module 4
07A0H 1952 Extension Module 7
07F0H 2032 Extension Module 8
Note: TAG XTnIOMAP is the Extension Module I/O Map of

Module n.

00 1 Byte CNF XTnIOMAP Extension Module I/O Map
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 0 XP1: I/O1 and I/O2 Not Used
X1 = 1 XP1: I/O1 and I/O2 Used

01 1 Byte CNF XTnIOTYP Extension Module I/O Type
0 0 0 0 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 0 XP1: I/O1 and I/O2 Digital
X1 = 1 XP1: I/O1 and I/O2 Analog
02 1 Byte CNF XTnIOMOD Extension Module I/O Mode

X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 0 XP1: I/O1 and I/O2 Input
X1 = 1 XP1: I/O1 and I/O2 Output
X2 = 0 XP1: I/03 and I/O4 Input
X6 = 1 XP2: I/O3 and I/04 Output
03 1 Byte CNF XTnADX Extension Module Address 1 to 255

(0 = not used)
04 Connection CNF XTnI1@ Point Connection - I1


12 Number CNF XTnAHR1 High Analog Range Point 1
13 Number CNF XTnALR1 Low Analog Range Point 1
28 Number R/W (E) XTnHIA1 High Alarm Limit Point 1 (*)

29 Number R/W (E) XTnLOA1 Low Alarm Limit Point 1 (*)
30 Number R/W (E) XTnHIA2 High Alarm Limit Point 2(*)
31 Number R/W (E) XTnLOA2 Low Alarm Limit Point 2(*)
(*) If the item is modified the new value is retransmitted to the

Extension Module.

44 2 Bytes R XTnAIS Extension Module Analog Input Status
X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 XTnAIH1 High Alarm Status Point 1
X2 = 1 XTnAIL1 Low Alarm Status Point 1
45 Number R XTnAI1 Analog Input Value 1

53 Number R/W XTnAO1 Analog Output Value Point 1(*)


Extension Module.

61 4 Bytes R/W XTnCNT1 Digital Input 1 Pulse Count(*)
69 1 Byte R/W XTnHDC Extension Module Hold Control

X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 XTnOUH1 Output 1 in Hold
70 1 Byte R/W XTnDO Digital Output Control and Status (*)

X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 XTnDO1 DO 1 is On

Extension Module.

71 1 Byte R XTnDIS Digital Input Status
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 XTnDI1 DI 1 is On
72 1 Byte R XTnST Extension Module Local Status

X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 0 X1
X1 = 0 XTnCOM Communication Status OK
X1 = 1 XTnCOM Module Not Answering
X3 = 1 XTnMIS XT Data Bases in DX and XT/XTM do
not match.
X4 = 1 XTnHARD XT/XTM Hardware Failure
X5 = 1 XTnSEL XT/XTM Selected on XT Bus
X6 = 1 XTnERR Combined XT/XTM Error
X1=1 or X3=1 or X4=1
X7 = 0 XTnFAIL XT/XTM Fail Mode (Set outputs to 0
upon communication failure.)
X7 = 1 XTnFAIL XT/XTM Fail Mode (Maintain output

status upon communication failure.)
X8 = 1 XTnPWR Loss of Power in XT/XTM Module

(Momentary Indication)

Time First Decimal Module Name
0840H 2112 Time Schedule 1
Scheduling
Items Structure
08A0H 2208 Time Schedule 7
08B0H 2224 Time Schedule 8
Note: TAG TSnOPT is Time Schedule Options of Schedule n.

00 1 Byte CNF TSnOPT Time Schedule Options
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X1
X1 = 0 Logic Output Type
X1 = 1 Numeric Output Type (not
implemented)
01 Connection CNF TSnEX@ External Extension Logical Connection

02 Connection CNF TSnON@ On Forcing Logical Connection
03 Connection CNF TSnOF@ Off Forcing Logical Connection
04 Number R/W (E) TSnXTM Extension Time (min.)

05 Number R TSnTIM Time to Next Event (min.)
06 1 Byte R/W TSnSTA Time Schedule Status

X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 R/W TSnHLD Hold Mode
X2 R/W TSnOUT Output Status and Control
X3 = 1 R/W TSnEXT Extension Command
X4 R TSnNXO Next Output
X5 = 1 R TSnEXS Extension (Keyboard/Serial Link)
X6 = 1 R TSnXDI Extension from DI
X7 = 1 R TSnONF Forced ON Status
X8 = 1 R TSnOFF Forced OFF Status

Optimal First Decimal Module Name
08C0H 2240 Optimal Start/Stop Module 1
Start/Stop Items
08E0H 2272 Optimal Start/Stop Module 2
Structure
Note: TAG OSnOPT is Module Options of Module n.

00 1 Byte CNF OSnOPT Module Options
0 0 0 0 0 0 X2 X1
X1 = 1 Heating Mode
X2 = 1 Cooling Mode
X2 = 1x1=1 Heating and Cooling Mode
01 Connection CNF OSnZT@ Zone Temperature Connection
02 Connection CNF OSnOT@ Outdoor Temperature Connection
03 Connection CNF OSnSP@ Zone Temperature Setpoint
Connection
04 Connection CNF OSnOB@ Off Setpoint Bias Connection
05 Connection CNF OSnDI@ Disable Module Connection
06 Connection CNF OSnDA@ Disable Adaptive Action Connection
07 Connection CNF OSnTS@ Connection at Time Schedule Output
08 Connection CNF OSnNX@ Connection at Next Output
09 Connection CNF OSnTIM@ Connection at Time to Next Output
10 Number CNF OSnPURGE Minimum Cool/Heat Time [min]

11 Number CNF OSnMAXST Maximum Startup Time [min]
12 Number CNF OSnMAXSO Maximum Optimal Stop Time [min]
13 Number CNF OSnBHK Start Mode Building Factor (Heating)
14 Number CNF OSnBCK Start Mode Building Factor (Cooling)
15 Number CNF OSnSBHK Stop Mode Building Factor (Heating)
16 Number CNF OSnSBCK Stop Mode Building Factor (Cooling)
17 Number CNF OSnFW Percentage Adaptive Control
(Filter Weight)
18 Number CNF OSnHTD Outdoor Design Temperature
(Heating)
19 Number CNF OSnCTD Outdoor Design temperature (Cooling)
20 Number CNF OSnCRNG Control Range
21 Number R/W OSnSP Zone Temperature On Setpoint

22 Number R/W OSnOB Zone Temperature Stop Mode Bias
23 Number R OSnTIM Calculated Optimal Startup Time
24 1 Byte R/W OSnSTA Operating Status
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 R/W OSnHLD Set Hold Mode
X2 R/W OSnOUT Output Status and Control
X3 = 1 R OSnHEAT Operating Mode (1=Heat)
X4 = 1 R OSnPRE Preheating or Precooling
X5 = 1 R OSnSTO Optimal Stop Active
X6 R OSnIN Value of the Command Input
X7 = 1 R OSnADP Adapting Algorithm Disabled
X8 = 1 R OSnDAS Module Disabled

Network First Decimal Module Name
0960H 2400 Network Information Module
Information
Module Items
Structure RI. Type R/W Tag Description
00 2 Byte Int. CNF NVADX Network Unit Identifier (DX Address)
01 2 Byte Int CNF NDON No. of Network Digital Output Modules (0-8)
02 2 Byte Int CNF NAON No. of Network Analog Output Modules (0-16)
03 2 Byte Int CNF NDIN No. of Network Digital Input Modules (0/1)
04 2 Byte Int CNF NAIN No. of Network Analog Input Modules (0/1)
05 2 Byte Int CNF NPTN No. of Programmable Table Entries
Network Digital First Decimal Module Name

0970H 2416 Network Digital Output Module 1
Output Module
09A0H 2464 Network Digital Output Module 2
Items Structure
09D0H 2512 Network Digital Output Module 3
0AC0H 2752 Network Digital Output Module 8
Note: TAG NDOn-1 is Digital Output 1 of Module n.

00 2 Bytes R NDOnCHG Digital Output Module Change
X1 = 1 Digital Output Module Connection Change
01 2 Bytes R NDOn Digital Output Status

X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 NDOn-1 Digital Output 1 is On

02 2 Bytes R NDOnSTA Digital Output Failure Status
X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 Digital Output 1 Failure
03 2 Byte Int CNF NDOnTYP Digital Output Type (= 83 (53 H) if used)
04 Destination CNF NDOn>1 Destination Output 1


20 Connection CNF NDOn-1@ Source of Output 1
Network Analog First Decimal Module Name

0AF0H 2800 Network Analog Output Module 1
Output Module
0B10H 2832 Network Analog Output Module 2
Items Structure
0BB0H 2992 Network Analog Output Module 7
0BD0H 3024 Network Analog Output Module 8
0BF0H 3056 Network Analog Output Module 9
0C10H 3088 Network Analog Output Module 10
0CB0H 3248 Network Analog Output Module 15
0CD0H 3280 Network Analog Output Module 16
Note: TAG NAOnOUT is the value of the Analog Output of

Module n.

00 2 Bytes R NAOnCHG Analog Output Module Change
X1 = 1 Analog Output Module Connection Change
01 Number R NAOn Analog Output Value
02 2 Bytes R NAOnSTA Analog Output Failure Status

X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 Analog Output 1 Failure
03 Z Byte CNF NAOnDIM Analog Output Value Dimension (units)

Integer (=55 (37H) if used)
04 Destination CNF NAOn>1 Destination Output 1

20 Connection CNF NAOn@ Analog Output Source

Network Digital First Decimal Module Name
0CF0H 3312 Network Digital Input Module
Input Module
Items Structure
00 2 Bytes R NDICHG Digital Input Module Change
X1 = 1 Digital Input Module Type Change
01 2 Bytes R NDI1 Digital Input Module 1 Status

X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 NDI1-1 Digital Input 1 is On

09 2 Bytes R NDISTA Digital Input Reliability Status

X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 NDIU1 Digital Input Module 1 Unreliable

10 2 Byte Int CNF NDI1TYP Digital Input Module 1 Type (=83 (53H) if used)
Network Analog First Decimal Module Name

0D10H 3344 Network Analog Input Module
Input Module
Items Structure
00 2 Bytes R NAICHNG Analog Input Module Change
X1 = 1 Analog Input Module Dimension Change
01 Number R NAI1 Analog Input 1 Value


17 2 Bytes R NAISTA Analog Input Reliability Status
X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X1 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X1 = 1 NAIU1 Analog Input 1 Unreliable
18 2 Byte Integer CNF NAI1DIM Analog Input 1 Value Dimension (=55 (37H) if used)

Appendix 3: Programmable
Function Module Items
Algorithm 1 - RI. PM Tag Alg. Tag Description

00 PMnTYP TYP Algorithm Type = 01
PID Controller
01 PMnOPT OPT Controller Options
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X9
X8 X7 0 X5 0 X3 0 X1
SOFE X1 = 1 Enable Shutoff Mode
STAE X3 = 1 Enable Startup Mode
SYME X5 = 1 Enable Symmetric Mode
PIDP X7 = 1 Enable PID to P Change
REM X8 = 1 Remote Mode
SOTO X9 = 1 Enable Shutoff to OFF Change
10 PMnI1@ PV@ Process Variable Connection

11 PMnI2@ RS@ Remote Setpoint Connection
12 PMnI3@ RV@ Reference Variable Connection
13 PMnI4@ PB@ Proportional Band Connection
14 PMnI5@ OF@ OFF Mode Logic Control Connection
15 PMnI6@ SB@ Standby Mode Logic Control Connection
16 PMnI7@ RA@ Reverse Acting Logic Control Connection
17 PMnI8@ EF@ External Forcing Logic Control Connection
20 PMnI11@ OB@ Output Bias Connection
22 PMnI13@ MNWS@ Minimum Working Setpoint Connection
23 PMnI14@ MXWS@ Maximum Working Setpoint Connection
26 PMnK1 LSP Local Setpoint
27 PMnK2 PB Proportional Band
28 PMnK3 TI Reset Action
29 PMnK4 TD Rate Action
30 PMnK5 BSB Change of Setpoint During Standby

31 PMnK6 BOF Change of Setpoint During Off
32 PMnK7 SBC Symmetry Band
33 PMnK8 EDB Error Deadband
34 PMnK9 OB Output Bias
35 PMnK10 MNWS Minimum Working Setpoint (Version 1.1 or later)
36 PMnK11 HIL Upper Limit of the Control Output
37 PMnK12 LOL Lower Limit of the Control Output
38 PMnK13 DHH Deviation High High Alarm Value
39 PMnK14 DH Deviation High Alarm Value

RI. PM Tag Alg. Tag Description
40 PMnK15 DL Deviation Low Alarm Value
41 PMnK16 DLL Deviation Low Low Alarm Value
42 PMnK17 MXWS Maximum Working Setpoint (Version 1.1 or later)
51 PMnK26 SOL Shutoff Output Level
52 PMnK27 STL Startup Output Level
59 PMnK34 EFL External Force Output Level
60 PMnOU1 OCM Control Output
61 PMnOU2 WSP Working Setpoint
63 PMnOU4 PV Actual Process Variable
64 PMnOU5 PVS PV Gain (100/Span)
65 PMnOU6 PVL PV Low Range
66 PMnOU7 RSP Actual Remote Setpoint
67 PMnOU8 RV Actual Reference Variable
70 PMnHDC Hold Mode Control/Status

0 0 0 0 0 0 X2 X1
HLD X1 = 1 Hold Control/Status
CMP X2 = 1 Computer Mode Request
72 PMnST Controller Status

0 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
CML X1 = 1 Controller Output at Low Limit
CMH X2 = 1 Controller Output at High Limit
FORC X3 = 1 Force-Back to OCM Active
LLDA X5 = 1 Deviation Alarm Low Low
LDA X6 = 1 Deviation Alarm Low
HDA X7 = 1 Deviation Alarm High
HHDA X8 = 1 Deviation Alarm High High
SOF X9 = 1 Shutoff Mode Active
STA X10 = 1 Startup Mode Active
EF X11 = 1 External Forcing Active
OF X12 = 1 OFF Mode Active
SB X13 = 1 Standby Mode Active
RA X14 = 1 Reverse Action Mode
HEAT X15 = 1 Heating Mode or PV Below
Symmetrical Band Center

ON/OFF
Controller
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
X8 0 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
SOFL X2 = 0 Shutoff Out Level = 0
STAL X4 = 0 Startup Out Level = 0
SYME X5 = 1 Enable Symmetric Mode
EFL X6 = 0 External Forcing Out Level = 0

11 PMnI2@ RS@ Remote Setpoint Connection
12 PMnI3@ RV@ Reference Variable Connection
26 PMnK1 LSP Local Setpoint

27 PMnK2 ACT Action Mode
28 PMnK3 DIF Differential
30 PMnK5 BSB Change of Setpoint During Standby
31 PMnK6 BOF Change of Setpoint During Off
32 PMnK7 SBC Symmetry Band
35 PMnK10 MNWS Minimum Working Setpoint (Version 1.1 or later)
38 PMnK13 DHH Deviation High High Alarm Value
39 PMnK14 DH Deviation High Alarm Value
40 PMnK15 DL Deviation Low Alarm Value
41 PMnK16 DLL Deviation Low Low Alarm Value

61 PMnOU2 WSP Working Setpoint
0 0 0 0 0 0 X2 X1
71 PMnDO Logic Outputs Control and Status

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X1
OCM X1 Control Output

0 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 0 0 0 0
STA X10= 1 Startup Mode Active
EF X11= 1 External Forcing Active
OF X12= 1 OFF Mode Active
SB X13= 1 Standby Mode Active
RA X14= 1 Reverse Action Mode
HEAT X15 = 1 Heating Mode (RA) or
PV Below Symmetrical Band Center

Heating/Cooling 00 PMnTYP TYP Algorithm Type = 03
PID Controller
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X9
X8 X7 0 0 0 X3 0 X1
PIDP X7 = 1 Enable PID to P Change
EZCO X10 = 1 Enable Zero Output Changeover
(Versions 1.4, 2.3, 3.3 or later)

11 PMnI2@ RS1@ Remote Setpoint Connection
12 PMnI3@ RV1@ Reference Variable Connection
13 PMnI4@ PB@ Proportional Band Connection
18 PMnI9@ RS2@ Second Loop Remote Setpoint Connection
19 PMnI10@ RV2@ Second Loop Reference Variable Connection
20 PMnI11@ OB1@ Output Bias Connection
21 PMnI12@ OB2@ Second Loop Output Bias Connection
26 PMnK1 LSP1 Local Setpoint - Loop 1

27 PMnK2 PB1 Proportional Band - Loop 1
28 PMnK3 TI1 Reset Action - Loop 1
29 PMnK4 TD1 Rate Action - Loop 1
30 PMnK5 BSB1 Change of Setpoint During - Loop 1
Standby
31 PMnK6 BOF1 Change of Setpoint During Off - Loop 1
33 PMnK8 EDB1 Error Deadband - Loop 1
34 PMnK9 OB1 Output Bias - Loop 1
35 PMnK10 MNWS Minimum Working Setpoint

36 PMnK11 HIL1 Upper Limit of the Control Output - Loop 1

37 PMnK12 LOL1 Lower Limit of the Control Output - Loop 1
38 PMnK13 DHH1 Deviation High High Alarm Value - Loop 1
39 PMnK14 DH1 Deviation High Alarm Value - Loop 1
40 PMnK15 DL1 Deviation Low Alarm Value - Loop 1
41 PMnK16 DLL1 Deviation Low Low Alarm Value - Loop 1

44 PMnK19 PB2 Proportional Band - Loop 2
45 PMnK20 TI2 Reset Action - Loop 2
46 PMnK21 TD2 Rate Action - Loop 2
47 PMnK22 BSB2 Change of Setpoint During - Loop 2
Standby
49 PMnK24 EDB2 Error Deadband - Loop 2
50 PMnK25 OB2 Output Bias - Loop 2
51 PMnK26 SOL Shutoff Output Level

52 PMnK27 STL Startup Output Level
53 PMnK28 HIL2 Upper Limit of the Control Output - Loop 2

54 PMnK29 LOL2 Lower Limit of the Control Output - Loop 2
59 PMnK34 EFL External Force Output Level
60 PMnOU1 OCM Control Output (Active Loop)

61 PMnOU2 WSP1 Working Setpoint - Loop 1
68 PMnAX1 OCM1 Control Output - Loop 1
69 PMnAX2 OCM2 Control Output - Loop 2

0 0 0 0 0 0 X2 X1
HLD X1 = 1
CMP X2 = 1

0 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 0 X3 X2 X1
CML X1 = 1 Controller Output at Low Limit
CMH X2 = 1 Controller Output at High Limit
FORC X3 = 1 Force-Back to OCM Active
HEAT X15= 1 Heating Mode (RA)

Heating/Cooling
ON/OFF
Controller 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
X8 0 X6 0 X4 X3 X2 X1

11 PMnI2@ RS1@ Remote Setpoint Connection - Loop 1
12 PMnI3@ RV1@ Reference Variable Connection - Loop 1
14 PMnI5@ OF@ OFF Mode Logic Control
Connection
15 PMnI6@ SB@ Standby Mode Logic Control
Connection
16 PMnI7@ RA@ Reverse Acting Logic Control
Connection
17 PMnI8@ EF@ External Forcing Logic Control
Connection
18 PMnI9@ RS2@ Remote Setpoint Connection - Loop 2
19 PMnI10@ RV2@ Reference Variable Connection - Loop 2
22 PMnI13@ MNWS@ Minimum Working Setpoint
Connection (Version 1.1 or later)
23 PMnI14@ MXWS@ Maximum Working Setpoint
Connection (Version 1.1 or later)
26 PMnK01 LSP1 Local Setpoint

27 PMnK02 ACT1 Action Mode - Loop 1
28 PMnK03 DIF1 Differential - Loop 1
30 PMnK05 BSB1 Change of Setpoint During Standby - Loop 1
35 PMnK10 MNWS Minimum Working Setpoint


42 PMnK17 MXWS Maximum Working Setpoint


44 PMnK19 ACT2 Action Mode - Loop 2
45 PMnK20 DIF2 Differential - Loop 2
47 PMnK22 BSB2 Change of Setpoint During Standby - Loop 2



0 0 0 0 0 0 X2 X1

0 0 0 0 X4 X3 0 X1
OCM X1 Control Output (Active Loop)
OCM1 X3 Control Output - Loop 1
OCM2 X4 Control Output - Loop 2

0 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 0 0 0 0
HEAT X15= 1 Heating Mode

Average
Calculation
10 PMnI1@ I1@ Input 1 Analog Connection
26 PMnK1 K0 Constant
36 PMnK11 HIL Upper Limit of the Calculated Output

37 PMnK12 LOL Lower Limit of the Calculated Output
60 PMnOU1 NCM Calculated Output

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X1
72 PMnST Programmable Function Module Status

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 X2 X1
NML X1 = 1 Calculated Output at Low Limit
NMH X2 = 1 Calculated Output at High Limit

Minimum
Selection


0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 X2 X1

Maximum
Selection


0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 X2 X1

Psychrometric
Calculation C
02 PMnF1 FUN1 Function Channel 1
0 0 0 0 0 X3 X2 X1
X3 X2 X1 = 000 Not Used
= 001 Enthalpy
= 010 Wet Bulb
= 011 Dew Point
0 0 0 0 0 X3 X2 X1
= 001 Enthalpy
10 PMnI1@ TM1@ Input 1 - Temperature Connection Channel 1

11 PMnI2@ RH1@ Input 2 - Humidity Connection Channel 1
12 PMnI3@ TM2@ Temperature Connection Channel 2
13 PMnI4@ RH2@ Relative Humidity Connection Channel 2
36 PMnK11 HIL1 Upper Limit of the Calculated Output Channel 1

37 PMnK12 LOL1 Lower Limit of the Calculated Output Channel 1
38 PMnK13 ATP1 Atmospheric Pressure Channel 1 (mbar)
60 PMnOU1 NCM1 Calculated Output Channel 1


0 0 0 0 0 0 X2 X1
HLD1 X1 = 1 Hold Channel 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 X4 X3 X2 X1
NML1 X1 = 1 Calculated Output at Low Limit Channel 1
NMH1 X2 = 1 Calculated Output at High Limit Channel 1
NML2 X3 = 1 Calculated Output at Low Limit Channel 2
NMH2 X4 = 1 Calculated Output at High Limit Channel 2
Note: 1. Channel 2 is only available in the DX-9100, Version 1.1 or

later, and provides only an enthalpy calculation.
2. Only one Algorithm 14 or 15 may be configured in a DX
controller.

Psychrometric 00 PMnTYP TYP Algorithm Type = 15
Calculation F 02 PMnF1 FUN1 Function Channel 1
0 0 0 0 0 X3 X2 X1
= 001 Enthalpy
= 010 Wet Bulb
= 011 Dew Point

0 0 0 0 0 X3 X2 X1
= 001 Enthalpy
10 PMnI1@ TM1@ Input 1 - Temperature Connection Channel 1

11 PMnI2@ RH1@ Input 2 - Humidity Connection Channel 1
12 PMnI3@ TM2@ Temperature Connection Channel 2
13 PMnI4@ RH2@ Relative Humidity Connection Channel 2



0 0 0 0 0 0 X2 X1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 X4 X3 X2 X1
NML1 X1 = 1 Calculated Output at Low Limit
Channel 1
NMH1 X2 = 1 Calculated Output at High Limit
Channel 1
NML2 X3 = 1 Calculated Output at Low Limit
Channel 2
NMH2 X4 = 1 Calculated Output at High Limit
Channel 2
Note: 1. Channel 2 is only available in the DX-9100, Version 1.1 or

later, and provides only an enthalpy calculation.
2. Only one Algorithm 14 or 15 may be configured in a DX
controller.

Line Segment
Function 01 PMnOPT OPT Algorithm Options
X16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
NEXT X16= 1 Chain to Next PM
10 PMnI1@ I1@ Input Connection
26 PMnK1 X0 Input Break Point 0

27 PMnK2 Y0 Output Break Point 0



0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X1

Input Selector
14 PMnI5@ I5@ Input 5 Logic Connection
15 PMnI6@ I6@ Input 6 Logic Connection
27 PMnK2 C1 Constant


0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 X2 X1

Calculator
02 PMnF1 FUN Function Type:
0 0 0 0 0 0 X2 X1
X2 X1 = 00 Not Used
X2 X1 = 01 Equation 1
X2 X1 = 10 Equation 2



0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 X2 X1

Timer Function
0 0 X6 X5 0 X3 X2 X1
X3 X2 X1 = 000 Channel Disabled
= 001 Pulse
= 010 Retriggerable Pulse
= 011 ON Delay with Memory
= 100 ON Delay
= 101 OFF Delay
X6 X5 = 00 Time in Seconds
= 01 Time in Minutes
= 10 Time in Hours
03 PMnF2 FUN2 Function Channel 2 as FUN1

10 PMnI1@ I1@ Input Connection Channel 1

11 PMnI2@ RS1@ Reset Connection Channel 1

23 PMnI14@ R7@ Reset Connection Channel 7
26 PMnK1 T1 Time Period Channel 1

60 PMnOU1 TIM1 Time to the End Of Period - Channel 1


X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1

X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
TDO1 X1 Digital Output Channel 1

Totalization
X8 0 0 0 0 X3 X2 X1
X3 X2 X1 = 000 Channel Disabled
= 001 Event Counter
= 010 Integrator
= 011 Time Counter
X8 =1 Increment ACTn and Reset
TOTn when FSSn=1 (Version
1.1 or later)



26 PMnK1 FSL1 Full Scale Limit Channel 1
34 PMnK09 FTC1 Scaling Factor/Time Constant Channel 1

60 PMnOU1 TOT1 Total - Channel 1


X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1

X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
FSS1 X1 = 1 Full Scale Status - Channel 1
73 PMnAC1 ACT1 Accumulated Total - Channel 1 (Version 1.1 or later)


Eight-Channel
Comparator
0 0 0 0 0 X3 X2 X1
X3 X2 X1 = 000 Channel
Disabled
= 001 High Limit
= 010 Low Limit
= 011 Equality Status
= 100 Dynamic Status

10 PMnI1@ I1@ Analog Input Connection Channel 1

11 PMnI2@ SP1@ Setpoint Reference Channel 1
Connection
Connection
Connection
Connection
Connection
Connection
Connection
Connection

26 PMnK1 SP1 Setpoint Channel 1
27 PMnK2 DF1 Differential Channel 1
60 PMnOU1 NCM1 Deviation (I1-SP1) - Channel 1


X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
LS1 X1 Logical Status - Channel 1

Sequencer
01 PMnOPT OPT Algorithm Options
X16 0 0 0 0 0 0 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
MODE X3 X2 X1 Algorithm Mode
= 000 Disabled
= 001 Step Mode (Last ON, First OFF)
= 010 Sequential (First ON, First OFF)
= 011 Binary Code
= 100 Equal Runtime
X6 = 1 Invert Stages in Set
X7 = 1 TON and TOFF Apply to Sets Only
X8 = 0 Analog Input
X8 = 1 Logic Input
X9 = 0 Pro-active Control
X9 = 1 Retro-active Control
NEXT X16= 1 Chain to Next PM
02 PMnF1 NST1 Number of Stages in Set (Stage 1 = 1st)

10 PMnI1@ DIS1@ Connection to Disable Output Stage 1

18 PMnI9@ INC@ Control Input 1 Connection (Increase or Analog)

19 PMnI10@ DEC@ Control Input 2 Connection (Decrease)
20 PMnI11@ FSD@ Connection for Fast Step Down (or OFF)

26 PMnK1 OLF1 Output Load Factor (%) Stage 1
34 PMnK9 T1 First Set ON Delay (sec.)

35 PMnK10 T2 Stage ON Delay (sec.)
36 PMnK11 T3 Set ON Delay (sec.)
37 PMnK12 T4 Stage OFF Delay (sec.)
38 PMnK13 T5 Set OFF Delay (sec.)
39 PMnK14 T4F Fast Step Down Stage Delay(sec.)

40 PMnK15 T5F Fast Step Down Set Delay (sec.)
41 PMnK16 TON Minimum ON Time (sec.)
42 PMnK17 TOFF Minimum OFF Time (sec.)
43 PMnK18 MAXC Maximum Number of Switching Cycles /set/hour
44 PMnK19 FLR Full Load Ramp Time (sec.)
45 PMnK20 LDF Interstage Load Differential (%)
60 PMnOU1 OUT Requested Output %

61 PMnOU2 OUTD Output Difference %
62 PMnOU3 OUTS Switched Output %

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X1
HLD X1 = 1 Hold Module
71 PMnDO DOUT Logic Outputs Control and Status

X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
STO1 X1 DO Stage 1
STO2 X2 DO Stage 2
STO3 X3 DO Stage 3
STO4 X4 DO Stage 4
STO5 X5 DO Stage 5
STO6 X6 DO Stage 6
STO7 X7 DO Stage 7
STO8 X8 DO Stage 8

X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X9
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
DIS1 X1 = 1 Output Stage 1 Disabled
MCS1 X9 = 1 Stage 1 Maximum Cycles Status

73 PMnAC1 RT1 Runtime Stage 1 (hours)


Algorithm 23 - (DX-9100 Version 1.1 or later)
Four-Channel
Line Segment RI. PM Tag Alg. Tag Description
Function 00 PMnTYP TYP Algorithm Tag = 23

26 PMnK1 X0-1 Channel 1 Input Break Point 0

27 PMnK2 Y0-1 Channel 1 Output Break Point 0



60 PMnOU1 NCM1 Output Channel 1


0 0 0 0 X4 X3 X2 X1

Algorithm 24 - (DX-9100 Version 1.1 or later)
Eight-Channel
Calculator RI. PM Tag Alg. Tag Description
00 PMnTyp TYP Algorithm Type = 24

0 0 0 0 0 X3 X2 X1
X3 X2 X1 = 000 Disabled
= 001 Addition
= 010 Subtraction
= 011 Multiplication
= 100 Division
= 101 Minimum
= 110 Maximum

10 PMnI1@ I1-1@ Input Connection 1 Channel 1


26 PMnK1 K1-1 Constant 1 Channel 1


X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1

Appendix 4: Logic Variables
Description of The DX-9100 contains logic variables, representing the individual

Logic Variables bits in status items. They are listed for use as logical status connections
and PLC parameters in the configuration of the DX-9100. Logic
variables are referred to by a byte address with a label (corresponding
to the label of the equivalent Status Item in the Item List), and a bit
position. When using the GX Tool for the DX-9100, the user will refer
to module tags and numbers and logic variable tags. Absolute
addresses (byte address and bit position) will normally not be required.
Note: When an address number is used for a connection inside the
DX-9100, the microprocessor will automatically select between
the Item List and the Logic Variables, depending on
whether the connection is for an analog type or for a logic type.

Logic Variable Byte No.
Tables Hex Dec Tag Description
00H 00 System Clock
X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 0
X2 = 1 Clock 0.5 sec.
X3 = 1 Clock 1 sec.
X4 = 1 Clock 2 sec.
X5 = 1 Clock 4 sec.
X6 = 1 Clock 8 sec.
X7 = 1 Clock 16 sec.
X8 = 1 Clock 32 sec.
01H 01 MNT Maintenance Control

02H 02 DIAG Diagnostic LOW BYTE
03H 03 DIAG Diagnostic HIGH BYTE
04H 04 DICT Digital Input Counters
05H 05 TOS TRIAC Output Status
06H 06 DIS Digital Input Status
07H 07 AIS Analog Input Status LOW BYTE
08H 08 AIS Analog Input Status HIGH BYTE
09H 09 LRST1 Logic Results LOW BYTE

0AH 10 LRST1 Logic Results HIGH BYTE
0BH 11 LRST2 Logic Results LOW BYTE
0CH 12 LRST2 Logic Results HIGH BYTE
0DH 13 LCOS1 Logic Constants LOW BYTE

0EH 14 LCOS1 Logic Constants HIGH BYTE
0FH 15 LCOS2 Logic Constants LOW BYTE
10H 16 LCOS2 Logic Constants HIGH BYTE
11H 17 SUP Supervisory Control LOW BYTE

12H 18 SUP Supervisory Control HIGH BYTE
13H 19 LRST3 Logic Results LOW BYTE (Version 1.1 or later)
14H 20 LRST3 Logic Results HIGH BYTE (Version 1.1 or later)
15H 21 LRST4 Logic Results LOW BYTE (Version 1.1 or later)
16H 22 LRST4 Logic Results HIGH BYTE (Version 1.1 or later)
17H 23 Spare

Byte No.
Hex Dec Tag Description
18H 24 PM1HDC Hold Control Programmable Function Module 1
19H 25 PM1DO Logic Outputs Programmable Function Module 1
1AH 26 PM1ST Status LOW BYTE Programmable Function Module 1
1BH 27 PM1ST Status HIGH BYTE Programmable Function Module 1
1CH 28 PM2HDC Hold Control Programmable Function Module 2

1DH 29 PM2DO Logic Outputs Programmable Function Module 2
1EH 30 PM2ST Status LOW BYTE Programmable Function Module 2
1FH 31 PM2ST Status HIGH BYTE Programmable Function Module 2

22H 34 PM3ST Status LOW BYTE Programmable Function Module 3
23H 35 PM3ST Status HIGH BYTE Programmable Function Module 3




Byte No.





Byte No.
48H 72 AIST1 Analog Input 1 Status

49H 73 AIST2 Analog Input 2 Status
4AH 74 AIST3 Analog Input 3 Status
4BH 75 AIST4 Analog Input 4 Status
4CH 76 AIST5 Analog Input 5 Status
4DH 77 AIST6 Analog Input 6 Status
4EH 78 AIST7 Analog Input 7 Status
4FH 79 AIST8 Analog Input 8 Status
50H 80 AOC1 Analog Output 1 Control and Status

51H 81 AOC2 Analog Output 2 Control and Status
52H 82 DOC3 Digital Output 3 Control and Status

58H 88 XT1AIS Alarms LOW BYTE - Extension Module 1

59H 89 XT1AIS Alarms HIGH BYTE - Extension Module 1
5AH 90 XT1HDC Hold Control - Extension Module 1
5BH 91 XT1DO Output Control - Extension Module 1
5CH 92 XT1DI Input Status - Extension Module 1
5DH 93 XT1ST Error Status - Extension Module 1
5EH 94 XT2AIS Alarms LOW BYTE - Extension Module 2

5FH 95 XT2AIS Alarms HIGH BYTE - Extension Module 2
60H 96 XT2HDC Hold Control - Extension Module 2
61H 97 XT2DO Output Control - Extension Module 2
62H 98 XT2DI Input Status - Extension Module 2
63H 99 XT2ST Error Status - Extension Module 2

Byte No.
6AH 106 XT4AIS Alarms LOW BYTE - Extension Module 4

6BH 107 XT4AIS Alarms HIGH BYTE - Extension Module 4
6CH 108 XT4HDC Hold Control - Extension Module 4
6DH 109 XT4DO Output Control - Extension Module 4
6EH 110 XT4DI Input Status - Extension Module 4
6FH 111 XT4ST Error Status - Extension Module 4


7AH 122 XT6DI Input Status - Extension Module 6
7BH 123 XT6ST Error Status - Extension Module 6
7CH 124 XT7AIS Alarms LOW BYTE - Extension Module 7

7DH 125 XT7AIS Alarms HIGH BYTE - Extension Module 7
7EH 126 XT7HDC Hold Control - Extension Module 7
7FH 127 XT7DO Output Control - Extension Module 7

Byte No.
88H 136 TS1STA Status and Control - Time Schedule 1

89H 137 TS2STA Status and Control - Time Schedule 2
8AH 138 TS3STA Status and Control - Time Schedule 3
8BH 139 TS4STA Status and Control - Time Schedule 4
8CH 140 TS5STA Status and Control - Time Schedule 5
8DH 141 TS6STA Status and Control - Time Schedule 6
8EH 142 TS7STA Status and Control - Time Schedule 7
8FH 143 TS8STA Status and Control - Time Schedule 8
90H 144 OS1STA Status and Control - Optimal Start/Stop 1

91H 145 OS2STA Status and Control - Optimal Start/Stop 2
92H 146 AOC9 Status and Control - Analog Output 9


Byte No.
98H 152 NDI1 LOW BYTE Network Digital Input Module 1
99H 153 NDI1 HIGH BYTE Network Digital Input Module 1
9AH 154 NDI2 LOW BYTE Network Digital Input Module 2
9BH 155 NDI2 HIGH BYTE Network Digital Input Module 2
9CH 156 NDI3 LOW BYTE Network Digital Input Module 3
9DH 157 NDI3 HIGH BYTE Network Digital Input Module 3
9EH 158 NDI4 LOW BYTE Network Digital Input Module 4
9FH 159 NDI4 HIGH BYTE Network Digital Input Module 4
A0H 160 NDI5 LOW BYTE Network Digital Input Module 5
A1H 161 NDI5 HIGH BYTE Network Digital Input Module 5
A8H 168 NDISTA LOW BYTE Network Digital Input Reliability Status
A9H 169 NDISTA HIGH BYTE (not used) Network Digital Input Reliability Status
AAH 170 NAISTA LOW BYTE Network Analog Input Reliability Status
ABH 171 NAISTA HIGH BYTE Network Analog Input Reliability Status
ACH 172
to
AFH 175 Spare for future expansion
B0H 176
to
BFH 191 Spare for future expansion
C0H 192
to
FFH 255 Local Variables used for PLC partial results

Appendix 5: Analog Items and
Logic Variables for the Trend
Log Module
For Metasys Point History For DX LCD Display
DX Versions 1.4, 2.3 and later: DX Versions 2.3. 3.3 and later:
Analog Items: Analog Items:
AI1 to AI8 AI1 to AI8
OUT1 to OUT8 OUT1 to OUT14
ACO1 to ACO8 ACO1 to ACO8
XTnA1 to XTnAI8* XTnAI1 to XTnAI8
XTnAO1 to XTnAO8* XTnAO1 to XTnAO8
PMnK1 to PMnK34
Logic Variables: PMnOU1 to PMnOU8
DIS (DI1..8) PMnAX1, PMnAX2
LRST1 Low Byte (LRS1..8)
LRST1 High Byte (LRS9..16) Logic Variables:
LRST2 Low Byte (LRS17..24) DIS (DI1..8)
LRST2 High Byte (LRS25..32) LRST1 Low Byte (LRS1..8)
XTnDI (XTnDI1..8)* LRST1 High Byte (LRS9..16)
LRST2 High Byte (LRS25..32)
TOS (DO3..8)
LCOS1 Low Byte (DCO1..8)
LCOS1 High Byte (DCO9..16)
LCOS2 Low Byte (DCO17..24)
LCOS2 High Byte (DCO25..32)
XTnDI (XTnDI1..8)
XTnDO (XTnDO1..8)
AIS Low Byte (AIH/L1..4)
AIS High Byte (AIH/L5..8)
XTnAIS Low Byte (XTnAIH/L1..4)
XTnAIS High Byte (XTnAIH/L5..8)
PMnDO (PMnDO1..8)
*Available in Metasys Release 11
Note: Since a logic variable byte is recorded when any one of its
variables changes state, you are recommended to assign LRS
logic variable bytes to trend log and to connect the source
variables (the ones that you wish to trend) to the LRS variables
in a PLC module.

For Metasys Point History For DX LCD Display
DX Version 2.3 and later only: DX Version 3.3 and later only:
Analog Items: Analog Items:
OUT9 to OUT14 NAI1 to NAI16
Logic Variables:
NDI1 Low Byte (NDI1-1..8)
NDI1 High Byte (NDI1-9..16)
Note: Since a logic variable byte is recorded when any one of its
variables changes state, you are recommended to assign LRS
logic variable bytes to trend log and to connect the source
variables (the ones that you wish to trend) to the individual LRS
variables in a PLC module.
Johnson Controls, Inc. www.johnsoncontrols.com

Westendhof 8 System 91 Manual
45143 Essen Rev. Level 0102
Germany Printed in Germany

DX-9100 Configuration Guide: DX-9100 Extended Digital Plant Controller (Including L W Compatible DX-912x, Version 3)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DX-9100 Configuration Guide: DX-9100 Extended Digital Plant Controller (Including L W Compatible DX-912x, Version 3)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DX-9100 Configuration Guide: DX-9100 Extended Digital Plant Controller (Including L W Compatible DX-912x, Version 3)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

System 91 Manual

DX-9100 Configuration Guide

DX-9100 Extended Digital Plant Controller Page 5

*Indicates changes made since the last printing

2002 Johnson Controls, Inc. 1

*Indicates changes made since the last printing

Appendix 2: Item Structure 199

*Indicates changes made since the last printing

Appendix 4: Logic Variables 259

Appendix 5: Analog Items and Logic Variables

*Indicates changes made since the last printing

Figure 1: Version 1 (DX-9100-8154)

Figure 2: DX-9100-8454 (Version 2) /

Version 3 Version 3 of the controller (DX-912x-8454) brings peer-to-peer

Further information about compatibility and interoperability with other

The rounding is due to the external communications bus protocol and

DX-9100 Via GX Tool

Via the SX Tool

Via the SX Tool

Via the GX Tool

Via the SX Tool

Via the GX Tool

Via the SX Tool

Configuration For configuration identification purposes a configuration number

Via the GX Tool

Via the SX Tool

Via the GX Tool

Via the SX Tool

Via the SX Tool

Via the SX Tool

Via the GX Tool (option only available with active sensor)

Via the SX Tool

Via the GX Tool

Via the SX Tool

Figure 3: How Alarm Limits Function

Via the GX Tool

Via the SX Tool

For Both SX and GX

Via the GX Tool

Via the SX Tool

GX Labels Source Points (Outputs)

Destination Points (Inputs)

Digital Prescale Count Pulse

(RI.06) (RI.22-29) (RI.04) (RI.13-20)

Figure 4: Digital Input Transitions

DI: User Name, Via the GX Tool

Via the SX Tool

Destination Points (Inputs)

AO: Output Type The output type can be configured as follows:

User Name and Via the GX Tool

Via the GX Tool

Via the SX Tool

Via the SX Tool

Via the GX Tool

Via the SX Tool

Via the GX Tool

Via the SX Tool

If OUTn < LLOn

Via the GX Tool